User Manual SRT1F

User Manual SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications UMN 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

SRT 1F

Siemens Mobile Communications S.p.A. 2002 V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10 I-20126 Milano Issued by Customer Documentation Department S.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158 I-20060 Cassina de’ Pecchi MI

Copyright (C) Fujitsu/Siemens 2002 Technical modifications possible without notice to customers. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN 1

Table of Contents GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................1-1 1.1

General description.................................................................................1-1

1.1.1

Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment..........................................1-1

1.1.2

Equipment Features ...............................................................................1-1

1.2

SRT 1F Equipment Details .....................................................................1-6

1.2.1

Ordering Guide .......................................................................................1-6

1.2.2

BRU (Branching Network Unit) ...............................................................1-8

1.2.3

MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) ..................................................1-8

1.2.4

SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) ....................................1-8

1.2.5

BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit)..............................................................1-9

1.2.6

General Specifications ..........................................................................1-10

1.2.7

General Information ..............................................................................1-10

1.2.8

Transmitter (TX) ...................................................................................1-11

1.2.9

Receiver (RX) .......................................................................................1-15

1.2.10

Modulator (MOD) ..................................................................................1-16

1.2.11

Demodulator (DEM) ..............................................................................1-16

1.2.12

Digital Processing .................................................................................1-17

1.2.13

Overall ..................................................................................................1-19

1.2.14

RF Interference.....................................................................................1-25

1.2.15

Countermeasures to Fading .................................................................1-26

1.2.16

Signal Interface for STM-1 System .......................................................1-27

1.2.16.1

Base Band Signal Interface ..................................................................1-27

1.2.16.2

Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface ................................................1-27

1.2.16.3

Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface .............................................1-28

1.2.16.4

Jitter......................................................................................................1-28

1.2.16.5

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) ................................................................1-28

1.2.16.6

BSI........................................................................................................1-29

1.2.17

Auxiliary Signal Interface ......................................................................1-29

1.2.17.1

Radio User Channel (RUC)...................................................................1-29

1.2.17.2

Way Side (WS) .....................................................................................1-29

1.2.17.3

Order Wire (OW) ..................................................................................1-30

1.2.17.4

User Channel (UC) ...............................................................................1-30

1.3

Mechanical Specification.......................................................................1-31

1.3.1

General.................................................................................................1-31

1.3.2

Rack construction .................................................................................1-32

1.3.3

Inter-Rack Connections ........................................................................1-32

1.3.4

Rack Layout..........................................................................................1-33

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

i

Table of Contents

2

ii

UMN

1.3.5

Unit Layout............................................................................................1-35

1.4

Environmental Specification..................................................................1-37

1.5

Power Requirements ............................................................................1-38

1.5.1

General.................................................................................................1-38

1.5.2

Unit Power Consumption ......................................................................1-38

1.6

Frequency Plan and Antenna System...................................................1-39

1.6.1

General Information ..............................................................................1-39

1.6.2

Frequency Plan.....................................................................................1-39

1.6.2.1

U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)............................1-43

1.6.2.2

4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3) .............................1-44

1.6.2.3

5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1) .................1-45

1.6.2.4

L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5) ...........................1-46

1.6.2.5

U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)...........................1-47

1.6.2.6

L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6) ...........................1-48

1.6.2.7

U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)...........................1-49

1.6.2.8

L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4) ...........................1-50

1.6.2.9

11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) ...........................1-51

1.6.3

13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4) ............................1-53

1.6.4

RF Branching Network..........................................................................1-54

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION....................................................................................2-1 2.1

Equipment Configurations and Features.................................................2-1

2.1.1

SRT 1F System ......................................................................................2-1

2.1.2

Terminal..................................................................................................2-1

2.1.3

Baseband Interface.................................................................................2-4

2.1.4

Alternated and Co-channel Operation.....................................................2-4

2.2

STM-1 Signal Transmission ....................................................................2-8

2.2.1

STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface............................................................2-8

2.2.2

Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function).........................................................2-8

2.2.3

Space Diversity.....................................................................................2-12

2.2.4

MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................2-13

2.2.4.1

Top View of MSTU Adapter ..................................................................2-15

2.2.5

Engineering Orderwire (OW) ................................................................2-16

2.2.6

User Channel (UC) ...............................................................................2-17

2.2.7

Radio User Channel (RUC)...................................................................2-18

2.2.8

Wayside Traffic (WS)............................................................................2-19

2.2.9

Digital Communication Channel (DCC) .................................................2-20

2.3

OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System.............................................2-21

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3

Table of Contents 2.3.1

MSOH and RSOH.................................................................................2-22

2.3.2

RFCOH.................................................................................................2-24

2.4

Radio Protection Switch System ...........................................................2-28

2.4.1

Outline of Radio Protection Switching ...................................................2-28

2.4.2

USW and BSW .....................................................................................2-30

2.4.3

Switching Priority ..................................................................................2-32

2.4.4

Switching Initiator and Operation Time .................................................2-33

2.4.5

Occasional Traffic (option) ....................................................................2-34

2.5

Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU)......................................2-35

2.5.1

Signal Interface.....................................................................................2-37

2.5.2

Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit.....................................................................2-37

2.5.3

Supervisory (SV) unit ............................................................................2-37

2.5.4

Timing Control Unit (TCU) ....................................................................2-42

2.5.5

Housekeeping (HK) unit........................................................................2-42

2.5.6

Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (option)...................................2-43

2.5.7

Occasional Interface (OCC INTF) unit (option) ....................................2-43

2.5.8

Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option) ..........................2-43

2.6

Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU)............................................................2-44

2.6.1

Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit .........................................................2-44

2.6.2

MSP SW and BBC................................................................................2-48

2.7

Applications ..........................................................................................2-51

2.7.1

Co-Channel Operation ..........................................................................2-51

2.7.2

Synchronization ....................................................................................2-53

2.7.2.1

Synchronization Source ........................................................................2-53

2.7.2.2

Synchronization Mode...........................................................................2-54

2.7.2.3

Clock Mode...........................................................................................2-56

2.7.2.4

Quality Level (S1 byte)..........................................................................2-56

2.7.2.5

Line Clock Priority.................................................................................2-57

2.7.3

Orderwire Applications..........................................................................2-58

2.7.3.1

Orderwire Extension .............................................................................2-58

2.7.3.2

Digital-Through .....................................................................................2-58

2.7.3.3

Ring Protection .....................................................................................2-58

INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................3-1 3.1

Installation preliminaries .........................................................................3-1

3.1.1

Storage, Unpacking and Inspection ........................................................3-1

3.1.1.1

Storage ...................................................................................................3-1

3.1.1.2

Preparation .............................................................................................3-2

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

iii

Table of Contents

iv

UMN

3.1.1.3

Unpacking and Inspection.......................................................................3-2

3.1.1.4

General Unpacking Method ....................................................................3-2

3.1.2

Storage of Spare Units ...........................................................................3-2

3.1.3

Accessories ............................................................................................3-3

3.2

Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers ..........................................................3-3

3.2.1

Warning and General Handling...............................................................3-3

3.2.1.1

Tools Required .......................................................................................3-3

3.2.1.2

Warning Messages .................................................................................3-3

3.2.1.3

Storage ...................................................................................................3-4

3.2.1.4

Handling .................................................................................................3-4

3.2.2

Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables....................................3-6

3.2.2.1

Tools Required .......................................................................................3-6

3.2.2.2

Preparation .............................................................................................3-6

3.2.2.3

Connection Procedure ............................................................................3-6

3.2.2.4

Disconnection Procedure ........................................................................3-6

3.2.3

Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors............................................3-6

3.2.3.1

Tools Required .......................................................................................3-6

3.2.3.2

Procedure ...............................................................................................3-7

3.2.4

Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors .........................................3-7

3.2.4.1

Connector End-face Definitions ..............................................................3-7

3.2.4.2

End-face Zone Definitions.......................................................................3-7

3.2.4.3

Defect Definitions....................................................................................3-8

3.2.4.4

Scratch and Pit Defects ..........................................................................3-8

3.2.4.5

Chip Defects ...........................................................................................3-9

3.2.4.6

Crack Defects .......................................................................................3-10

3.2.4.7

Tools Required .....................................................................................3-11

3.2.4.8

Procedure .............................................................................................3-11

3.3

Rack Installation ...................................................................................3-11

3.3.1

Precautions...........................................................................................3-11

3.3.1.1

Suitable Places for Equipment Installation ............................................3-11

3.3.2

Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.............................................3-12

3.3.3

Tools Required .....................................................................................3-12

3.3.4

Preparation ...........................................................................................3-12

3.3.4.1

Bay Mounting........................................................................................3-13

3.3.4.2

Bay Securing ........................................................................................3-13

3.3.5

Rack Configuration ...............................................................................3-14

3.3.6

Shelf Configuration ...............................................................................3-16

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

Table of Contents 3.3.7

How to Install Shelves & Units ..............................................................3-18

3.3.7.1

Preparation of Shelves..........................................................................3-18

3.3.8

Mounting of Shelves .............................................................................3-20

3.3.8.1

Mounting of Slide-In Units.....................................................................3-22

3.4

Inter Shelf Connections.........................................................................3-26

3.4.1

SRT 1F Input ........................................................................................3-26

3.4.1.1

Warning Messages ...............................................................................3-26

3.4.2

Waveguide Connection.........................................................................3-27

3.4.2.1

Tools Required .....................................................................................3-28

3.4.2.2

Preparation ...........................................................................................3-29

3.4.2.3

Precautions...........................................................................................3-29

3.4.3

Connection of Primary Power Lead.......................................................3-29

3.4.3.1

Tools Required .....................................................................................3-29

3.4.3.2

Procedure .............................................................................................3-32

3.4.3.3

Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment........................................................3-33

3.4.3.4

Precautions...........................................................................................3-33

3.4.4

AMP hand Crimping Tool ......................................................................3-34

3.4.4.1

CRIMPING PROCEDURES ..................................................................3-36

3.4.4.2

Assembling of AMP Connector .............................................................3-37

3.4.4.3

Office Power Supply Check ..................................................................3-37

3.4.4.4

Tools Required .....................................................................................3-37

3.4.4.5

Procedure .............................................................................................3-37

3.4.5

Frame Grounding..................................................................................3-38

3.4.6

Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms .................................................3-39

3.4.7

Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors ............................................................3-39

3.4.8

Inter shelf Connection for RPS, SV, and DCC ......................................3-41

3.4.9

Baseband Signal Cable Connection......................................................3-42

3.4.9.1

STM-1 electrical signal Interface...........................................................3-42

3.4.9.2

STM-1 optical signal Interface...............................................................3-43

3.4.10

Wayside Signal Cable Connection........................................................3-45

3.4.11

Inter shelf connection for CO-channel operation ...................................3-46

3.5

Connector and Connector Pin Assignment ...........................................3-48

3.5.1

Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB)..................................3-48

3.5.1.1

Connectors on the BWB of SCSU ........................................................3-50

3.5.1.2

Connectors on the BWB of BBIU ..........................................................3-51

3.5.2

Connector PIN assignment for OSSI ....................................................3-52

3.5.3

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1 ............................3-53

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

v

Table of Contents

4

vi

UMN

3.5.4

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 2 ............................3-54

3.5.5

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 3 ............................3-55

3.5.6

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 4 ............................3-56

3.5.7

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 5 ............................3-57

3.5.8

Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel .............................3-58

3.5.9

Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS ..................................3-59

3.5.10

Connector PIN assignment for EOW ....................................................3-60

3.5.11

Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC .................................................3-61

3.5.12

Connector PIN assignment for User Channel .......................................3-62

3.5.13

Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock ................................3-63

ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP ................................................................................4-1 4.1

ACCEPTANCE OF THE SRT 1F ............................................................4-1

4.1.1

Perform Overall Visual Inspection...........................................................4-1

4.1.2

Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack .....................................4-2

4.1.2.1

Test Equipment Required .......................................................................4-2

4.1.2.2

Procedure ...............................................................................................4-2

4.2

Installation of the SRT 1F Slide-in Units..................................................4-3

4.2.1

Warning Messages .................................................................................4-3

4.2.1.1

Laser Warning ........................................................................................4-3

4.2.1.2

Electrostatic Discharge Warning.............................................................4-3

4.2.2

Slide-In Installation Procedures ..............................................................4-5

4.2.3

Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units ..................................................4-5

4.2.3.1

Inserting a Slide-In Unit...........................................................................4-6

4.2.3.2

Removing a Slide-In Unit ........................................................................4-7

4.2.3.3

Removing an Optical Unit .......................................................................4-8

4.2.4

Installing the MSTU Unit .........................................................................4-9

4.2.5

Installing SCSU Unit ...............................................................................4-9

4.2.6

Installing BBIU Unit ................................................................................4-9

4.2.7

Installing the Optical Interface (OPT INTF) Unit......................................4-9

4.2.7.1

Procedure ...............................................................................................4-9

4.3

SRT 1F Acceptance and Turn-Up Tests ...............................................4-10

4.3.1

Warning Messages ...............................................................................4-10

4.3.1.1

Laser Warning ......................................................................................4-10

4.3.1.2

Inserting Plug–in Units ..........................................................................4-10

4.3.1.3

Electrostatic Discharge Warning...........................................................4-11

4.3.2

SRT 1F In-Station, Inter-Station and End to End Tests.........................4-12

4.3.3

Test Equipment Required .....................................................................4-13

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

Table of Contents 4.4

Waveguide and Antenna Alignment Tests ............................................4-14

4.4.1

Waveguide Sweeping ...........................................................................4-14

4.4.1.1

Procedure for Return Loss Measurement .............................................4-14

4.4.2

Antenna Alignment ...............................................................................4-16

4.4.2.1

AGC Current Monitoring .......................................................................4-16

4.4.2.2

Antenna XPIC Optimization ..................................................................4-17

4.4.3

Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms .................................................4-17

4.5

SRT 1F In-Station Performance Tests ..................................................4-18

4.5.1

Hardware Settings ................................................................................4-18

4.5.1.1

Default Values ......................................................................................4-18

4.5.2

Provisioning (Software Settings) ...........................................................4-18

4.5.2.1

Default Values ......................................................................................4-18

4.5.3

Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency....................................................4-19

4.5.3.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-19

4.5.3.2

Specification .........................................................................................4-19

4.5.3.3

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-20

4.5.4

Transmit Output Power Level................................................................4-21

4.5.4.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-21

4.5.4.2

Specification .........................................................................................4-21

4.5.4.3

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-21

4.5.5

Transmit Spectrum ...............................................................................4-23

4.5.5.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-23

4.5.5.2

Specification .........................................................................................4-23

4.5.5.3

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-24

4.5.6

Receiver (RX) AGC Range ...................................................................4-25

4.5.6.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-25

4.5.6.2

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-25

4.5.7

Optical Output Power Level ..................................................................4-27

4.5.7.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-27

4.5.7.2

Specification .........................................................................................4-27

4.5.7.3

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-27

4.5.8

Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level .....................................4-29

4.5.8.1

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-29

4.5.9

External Clock Supply...........................................................................4-31

4.5.9.1

Warning Messages ...............................................................................4-31

4.5.9.2

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-31

4.5.10

Rack Alarm Test ...................................................................................4-33

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

vii

Table of Contents

viii

UMN

4.5.10.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-33

4.5.10.2

Test procedure......................................................................................4-33

4.6

SRT 1F Inter-Station Tests ...................................................................4-35

4.6.1

Receive (RX) Signal Level ....................................................................4-35

4.6.1.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-35

4.6.1.2

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-35

4.6.2

IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE...............................................................4-36

4.6.3

SPACE DIVERSITY EQUALIZATION...................................................4-40

4.6.4

ATPC Test (End to End LAB Test)........................................................4-45

4.6.4.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-45

4.6.4.2

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-45

4.7

SRT 1F End to End Station Performance Tests....................................4-47

4.7.1

Remote NE Management via DCC .......................................................4-47

4.7.1.1

DCC configuration ................................................................................4-47

4.7.1.2

Test ......................................................................................................4-49

4.7.2

Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test .....................................................4-51

4.7.2.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-51

4.7.2.2

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-51

4.7.3

Way Side Test ......................................................................................4-53

4.7.3.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-53

4.7.3.2

Way Side Transmission Test ................................................................4-53

4.7.4

BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test).....................................................4-55

4.7.4.1

Equipment Required .............................................................................4-55

4.7.4.2

Specification .........................................................................................4-55

4.7.5

BACKGROUND BER TEST..................................................................4-58

4.7.6

Synchronization ....................................................................................4-60

4.7.6.1

Clock Sources selection........................................................................4-60

4.7.6.2

Test ......................................................................................................4-62

4.7.7

MSP Switching Test..............................................................................4-63

4.7.7.1

Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-63

4.8

Appendix...............................................................................................4-65

4.8.1

MSTU Setting .......................................................................................4-65

4.8.1.1

MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................4-66

4.8.1.2

DADE setting for SD .............................................................................4-69

4.8.2

Hardware Setting ..................................................................................4-71

4.8.2.1

SV unit ..................................................................................................4-72

4.8.2.2

TCU unit ...............................................................................................4-73

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5

A

Table of Contents 4.8.2.3

BSW unit ..............................................................................................4-74

4.8.2.4

OCC INTF unit ......................................................................................4-75

4.8.2.5

PE INTF unit .........................................................................................4-76

4.8.3

Provisioning through LCT .....................................................................4-77

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................5-1 5.1

LED Indications.......................................................................................5-1

5.2

LCT.........................................................................................................5-5

5.2.1

Start-up LCT Operation...........................................................................5-6

5.2.2

Alarm (Condition) Type and Description ...............................................5-11

5.2.3

Performance Monitor ............................................................................5-18

5.2.4

Analog Monitor......................................................................................5-21

5.2.5

Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) ...............................................5-23

5.3

Radio Protection Switch ........................................................................5-24

5.3.1

Automatic Switching and Status Indication............................................5-26

5.3.2

Manual Control .....................................................................................5-26

5.3.3

SW PM Data.........................................................................................5-27

5.3.4

Auto Refresh.........................................................................................5-27

5.3.5

Notice for RPS Operation .....................................................................5-28

5.3.5.1

Power off of SCSU................................................................................5-28

5.3.5.2

Lockout .................................................................................................5-28

5.3.5.3

Power off of MSTU ...............................................................................5-28

5.4

Maintenance Control of Other Functions...............................................5-29

5.4.1

Loop Back.............................................................................................5-29

5.4.2

Protection Switch Operation (MSP).......................................................5-31

5.4.2.1

Multiplex Section Protection..................................................................5-31

5.4.2.2

TCU unit Protection ..............................................................................5-31

5.4.2.3

Synch Switch ........................................................................................5-31

5.4.3

ALS Release.........................................................................................5-32

5.5

Unit Replacement .................................................................................5-33

5.5.1

Fan Replacement .................................................................................5-33

5.5.2

MSTU and Other Units..........................................................................5-35

5.5.3

SV unit Replacement ............................................................................5-36

5.5.4

Returning Replaced Unit .......................................................................5-39

5.6

APPENDIX............................................................................................5-41

5.6.1

LCT Command Tree and Functions......................................................5-41

APPENDIX................................................................................................................... 1 A.1

Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms................................................................... 1

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

ix

Table of Contents

x

UMN

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.1 1.1.1

General description Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment The SRT 1F series radio equipment is a high capacity (155 Mbit/s STM1) system designed for trunk line transmission applications. The SRT 1F series operate in the 4/5/U6/11 GHz radio frequency bands with 40 MHz frequency spacing, and in the U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz radio frequency bands with 28.00, 29.00 and 29.65 MHz frequency spacing. The equipment is fully solid state and is designed to meet ITU-T and ITU-R Recommendations for long haul and high capacity digital microwave radio systems. The modulation scheme used is 64/128 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) with forward error correction. The SRT 1F can be used in various types of SDH networks such as ring, media diversity or linear configurations, and over various communication routes , i.e., waterways, mountains, inter or intra-city routes. The SRT 1F accepts one synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1) signal per RF frequency for alternated operation, or two synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM1) signals per RF frequency for co-channel operation. The protection scheme is N+1 for alternated operation and (N+1)×2 for co-channel operation. Various optional functions are provided, such as 2 Mb/s wayside traffic (carried by RFCOH and SOH respectively) and digital service channels (carried by RFCOH). Each RF channel can carry two wayside signals plus two digital service channels, and all protected by the N+1 Radio Protection System (RPS).

1.1.2

Equipment Features The main features of the SRT 1F series radio equipment are; •

Completely solid-state

•

Fully SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) compatible digital radio.

•

Interconnectabilityy with other manufacturers’ SDH transmission equipment available. (Further study might be necessary for undefined overhead bytes,etc.)

•

SDH STM-1 optical interface available as an option.

•

1+1 protected STM-1 optical interface for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP).

•

Section overhead (SOH) bits insertion/extraction at both terminal and repeater stations, the same as for SDH optical fiber transmission systems.

•

High power amplifier using GaAs Field Effect Transistor (GaAs FET)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-1

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-2

UMN

•

Low power consumption of the RF High Power Amplifier using IF pre-distortion linearity compensation.

•

Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is available as standard configuration.

•

Low noise amplifier using High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT) with a noise figure of 1.5 dB (typical) for 4-6 GHz band.

•

High spectral efficiency of 8.5 bits/sec/Hz using 64 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (64 QAM MLCM) and 11.4 bits/sec/Hz using 128 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (128 QAM MLCM) for cochannel operation.

•

High efficiency error correction using Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM).

•

Super high density packaging: Eight (8) complete SDH radio system including Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) are mounted in one ETSI rack (2200×600×300 mm).

•

Space diversity reception is available as a standard function (by software-based). In-Phase (IP) combiner is used.

•

Adaptive demodulator with fully digital linear transversal equalizer (TVE) with decision feedback equalizer (DFE).

•

Errorless protection switching with early warning detection on fading.

•

Radio user channel (RUC) for a maximum of 2 channels using RFCOH. Signal interfaces are available for both VF and 64 kb/s signal. 64 kb/s signal interface complies with ITU-T recommendation G.703 for co-directional or contra-directional interface.

•

One user channel using F1 byte of SOH per STM-1 is also available.

•

Two 2 Mb/s wayside traffic channels using SOH and RFCOH are available.

•

Event management facility: Alarms and status of the equipment is reported by the SEMF (Synchronous Equipment Management Function) using the Data Communication Channel (DCC)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION •

Performance management facility: Traffic performance of each hop and of each end-to-end can be monitored on each RF channel. Monitoring items are BBE (Background Block Error), BBER (Background Block Error Ratio), ES(Errored Seconds), ESR(Errored Second Ratio), SES (Severely Error Seconds), SESR (Severely Error Second Ratio), UAS (UnAvailable Seconds) and OFS (Out of Frame Second), number of pointer change and number of MSP and RPS switching.

•

Configuration management facility: NE configuration is retrieved by the network management terminal and items such as NE ID, and alarm thresholds can be set as “provisioning”.

•

Resource management facility: Physical inventory such as unit name, can be read by the SEMF.

•

Security management: Several maintenance levels are provided to avoid malfunction.

•

LCT is the local terminal for network element (NE) windows NT based.

•

Software download (SWDL) facility: Firmware used for SRT 1F operation can be remotely downloaded from the network management terminal.

•

Repeater hardware configuration: Repeater stations and terminals have the same configuration.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-3

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

•

SDH MUX

SDH MUX

SDH Radio

SDH Radio

SDH MUX

LTE

ADM

1+N

1+N

LTE

MS Mode

MS Mode

Tributary

Tributary

MS

Tributary

MS

Note: MS : Multiplex Section RS : Regenerator Section

MS

MS

LTE : Line Terminal Equipment ADM : Add Drop Multiplexer

Network feature : Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) with Section Adaption (SA). Figure 1.1 - Linear Configuration

SDH MUX

SDH MUX

SDH MUX

LTE

ADM

LTE

Tributary

Tributary

MS

MS

SDH Radio

SDH Radio

1+N or 0+1

1+N or 0+1

MS Mode

MS Mode

MS

Tributary

MS

Network feature : Network protection switching with media diversity Figure 1.2 - Media Diversity Configuration

1-4

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION MS

MS Tributary SDH MUX ADM

SDH MUX

SDH MUX

ADM

ADM

Tributary

MS

Tributary SDH Radio

SDH Radio

1+N or 0+1

1+N or 0+1

MS Mode

MS Mode

MS

MS

Network feature : Network protection switching with ring operation Figure 1.3 - Standard Ring Configuration

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-5

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2 1.2.1

UMN

SRT 1F Equipment Details Ordering Guide Assembling an SRT 1F rack means having to select the proper equipment from the ordering guide. Please contact Siemens’s Sales and Marketing dept. for the current ordering guide. Figure 1.4 shows the configuration of an (N+1) SRT 1F terminal equipment.

SRT 1F Terminal Equipment Rack

BRU

: ETSI Rack x 1

: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 1 RF Branching Network Circuit x (Main CHs + Prot)

MSTU

: Main Signal Transmission Unit x (Main CHs + Prot)

SCSU

: Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit Subrack x 1 SV

: Supervisory Unit xx11

BSW

: Base-Band Switch Unit x (Main CHs)

TCU

: Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option)

HK

: Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 max.

ECU

: Embedded Communication Unit (option) x 2 max.

OCC INTF BBIU

: Occasional traffic Interface Unit (option) x 1

: Base-Band Interface Unit Subrack, optional for Optical Interface BBC

: Base-Band Control Unit x 1

OPT INTF : Optical Interface Unit x (Main CHs) For usage of MSP x (2 Main CHs)

MSP SW

: Multiplex Section Protection SW Unit for OPT INTF x (Main CHs)

Figure 1.4 - (N+1, N = max. 7) SRT 1F Terminal Radio Equipment, Alternated operation

1-6

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Figure 1.5 shows the configuration of an SRT 1F terminal radio equipment operating in the 2×(N+1) co-channel operation mode. One rack is used for vertical polarization, another for horizontal polarization.

SRT 1F Terminal Equipment Rack

BRU

: ETSI Rack x 2

: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 2 RF Branching Network Circuit x (Main CHs + Prot) x 2

MSTU

: Main Signal Transmission Unit x (Main CHs + Prot) x 2

SCSU

: Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit x 2 SV

: Supervisory Unit xx11

BSW

: Base-Band Switch Unit x (Main CHs)

TCU

: Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option)

BSW INTF : BSW Interface x 1 for RPS Group 2 HK

: Housekeeping Unit x 2 max.

ECU

: Embedded Communication Unit(option) x 2 max.

OCC INTF BBIU

: Occasional traffic Interface Unit(option) x 2 max.

: Base-Band Interface Unit (option) x 2 BBC

: Base-Band Control Unit x 2

OPT INTF : Optical Interface Unit x (Main CHs) For usage of MSP x (2 Main CHs)

MSP SW

: Multiplex Section Protection SW Unit for OPT INTF x (Main CHs)

Figure 1.5 - 2 x (N+1, N = max. 7) SRT 1F Terminal Radio Equipment, Co-channel operation

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-7

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.2

UMN

BRU (Branching Network Unit) To define the BRU, the following requirements must be detailed:

1.2.3

i)

Operating frequency band

ii)

Assigned RF channel number and frequency

iii)

System configuration (1+0, 1+1, 2+1,........., 7+1)

iv)

Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation

v)

With SD (Space Diversity) or without SD

MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) To define the MSTU, the following requirements must be detailed: i)

Operating frequency band

ii)

Assigned RF channel number and frequency

iii)

Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation

Note: SD receiver circuit is equipped as a standard circuit on the SRT 1F receiver.

1.2.4

SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) To define the SCSU, the following requirements must be detailed:

1-8

i)

RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels

ii)

Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation

iii)

Required optional unit name, such as INTF, and its quantity.

iv)

Sub-module of SV unit for RUC (VF, Digital interface or none)

ECU, HK, TCU, OCC

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.5

BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit) To define the BBIU, the following requirements must be detailed: i)

RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels

ii)

Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation

iii)

Requirement for MSP function.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-9

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

1.2.6

General Specifications

1.2.7

General Information Table 1.1 - General Specifications Description

Modulation

64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) for 4/5/U6/11 GHz band 128 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) for U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz band

Capacity

Alternated operation One (1) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency Co-channel operation Two (2) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency Auxiliary signal Wayside traffic (2.048 Mb/s) Maximum 2 channels per STM-1 by using RFCOH and SOH. Maximum 2N channels for N+1 alternated operation or Maximum 2 x 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation Radio User Channel (64 kb/s) Maximum 2 channels per system using RFCOH for N+1 Maximum 2 channels for N+1 alternated operation or Maximum 2 x 2 channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation User Channel (SOH, 64 kb/s) One (1) channel per STM-1 using SOH Maximum N channels for N+1 alternated operation or Maximum 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation

Repeating Method

Regenerative

Overhead Byte Access

Same insertion/extraction method as for SDH fibre optic transmission system for terminal and repeater station RS Section (Note-1) A1, A2, C1, B1, E1, F1, D1–D3 byte MS Section (Note-2) B2, K1, K2, D4–D12 and E2, M1 and S1 byte.

Hypothetical Reference Digital Path (HRDP)

1-10

In accordance with the latest ITU-R recommendation

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.8

Transmitter (TX) Table 1.2 - Transmitter section Description

Output power

+32/29 dBm±1 dB for 4-L8GHz band +29 dBm±1 dB for 11GHz band +27 dBm±1 dB for 13GHz band measured at MSTU unit output

Linearity compensation

Linearizer circuit is employed to maintain optimum linearity

Local carrier

RF band oscillation With PLL Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable Coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band (quarter band for 11 and 13GHz).

Local Frequency stability

Within ± 10 ppm

Spurious emission

For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output < –60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz < –30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz

IF

1st IF: 70 MHz 2nd IF: 844 MHz

IF input (Test In)

Signal level: –10 dBm nominal Variation: ±1 dB Impedance: Return loss:

RF filter

75 ohm unbalanced > 20 dB/ 70 MHz ±13 MHz for 64 QAM > 20 dB/ 70 MHz ±11 MHz for 128 QAM

Chebycheff type 3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM 30 MHz for 128 QAM

ATPC

Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) is standard. Power control level: 10 dB Response time: 100 ms Control initiation: Received signal threshold detection

Transmitted output spectrum

64 MLCM: Figure 1.6 128 MLCM: Figure 1.7 128 MLCM: Figure 1.8

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-11

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

+1 0 14MHz +1dB

-10

19.5MHz -10dB

-20 -30 -40

24MHz -35dB

-50 -60 -70

39.5MHz -65dB

-80 -90

55MHz -95dB

-100 0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

100

RF frequency (MHz)

Figure 1.6 Transmitter output spectrum

(64QAM system, 40 MHz spacing) (Exclude emissions which result from the modulation process)

1-12

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

+2 0 12MHz +2dB 14.5MHz -6dB

-10 -20

18MHz -32dB

-30 -40

17MHz -32dB

-50 22MHz -45dB

-60 -70

34MHz -65dB

-80

60MHz -105dB

-90 32MHz -85dB 40MHz -95dB

-100 -110 0

5

10

15

20

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

RF freque nc y (MHz)

Figure 1.7 Transmitter output spectrum (128QAM system, 29 / 29.65 MHz spacing) (Exclude emissions which result from the modulation process)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-13

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

+1 0 13MHz +1dB

-10 -20

21MHz -35dB

-30 -40 20MHz -35dB

-50 -60 -70

29.5MHz -65dB

-80 0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

RF frequency (MHz)

Figure 1.8 Transmitter output spectrum (128QAM system, 28 MHz spacing) (Exclude emissions which result from the modulation process)

1-14

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.9

Receiver (RX) Table 1.3 - Receiver section Description

Noise figure (Note 1)

1.5 dB typical 2.0 dB guaranteed 2.0 dB typical 2.5 dB guaranteed 2.5 dB typical 3.0 dB guaranteed 4.0 dB typical 4.5 dB guaranteed

(for 4 ~ 6 GHz band) (for 4 ~ 6 GHz band (for 7 ~ 8 GHz band) (for 7 ~ 8 GHz band) (for 11 GHz band) (for 11 GHz band) (for 13 GHz band) (for 13 GHz band)

Note 1: Noise figure is measured at the MSTU unit input on both the main and SD receiver, independently, and at maximum IF amplifier gain. Local carrier

RF band oscillation with PLL Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable Half band coverage on lower or upper half of the corresponding band (quarter band for 11 and 13 GHz band).

Spurious emission

For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output < –60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz < –30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz

Local Frequency stability

Within ±10 ppm (11 GHz)

Image rejection

More than 100 dB with RX BPF measured at the MSTU output when the image and main signal levels are equal, and with unmodulated carrier.

Normal received power

–32 to –55 dBm

Received input range

Maximum level:

–17 dBm

Minimum level:

–74.5 dBm for 64QAM –72.0 dBm for 128QAM

(for BER at 1 x 10

–3

)

AGC dynamic range

–17 to –77 dBm measured at MSTU input

IF

1st IF: 70MHz 2nd IF: 844MHz

IF output (70 MHz) (Test Out)

Signal level: –10 dBm nominal, +l dB/–2 dB variation for –17 to –77 dBm modulated RX input Impedance :

75 ohm unbalanced

Return loss : > 20 dB/ 70 MHz

±13 MHz for 64 QAM ±11 MHz for 128 QAM

Measured at the MSTU unit monitoring point. RF filter

Chebycheff type 3 dB bandwidth:

IF filter

40 MHz for 64 QAM 30 MHz for 128 QAM

Butterworth type 3 dB bandwidth 40 MHz

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-15

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.10

UMN

Modulator (MOD) Table 1.4 - Modulation Description

Modulation

Spectrum shaping

Local carrier Local frequency stability IF

1.2.11

For 40 MHz Channel spacing: 64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) For 28/29/29.65/30 MHz Channel spacing: 128-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM or 25 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution. Crystal oscillator (XO) Within ± 15 ppm 70 MHz

Demodulator (DEM) Table 1.5 - Demodulation Description

Demodulation Spectrum shaping

IF Adaptive equalizer in baseband Adaptive equalizer in IF

1-16

Coherent detection/instantaneous decision 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM or 25 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution. 70 MHz 10-tap linear transversal equalizer (TVE) and 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) Slope equalizer

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.12

Digital Processing Table 1.6 - Digital Processing Description

SDH Electrical interface

CMI-to-unipolar conversion Unipolar-to-CMI conversion Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame Section Adaptation (change the pointer) Scrambler/descrambler Addition/drop of section Overhead bit (1) Framing bit (A1, A2) (2) Regenerator section party (B1) (3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3) (4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1) (5) User channel (F1) (6) Multiplex section Parity (B2) (7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12) (8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2) (9) AIS, FERF (K1, K2) (10) Section trace (J0) (11) Far End Block Error (M1) (12) Synchronization status byte (S1)

SDH optical interface

Optical-to-electrical conversion Electrical-to-optical conversion Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame Section Adaptation (change the pointer) Scrambler/descrambler Addition/drop of section Overhead byte (1) Framing bit (A1, A2) (2) Regenerator section parity (B1) (3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3) (4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1) (5) User channel (F1) (6) Multiplex section Parity (B2) (7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12) (8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2) (9) MSP CONT (K1, K2) (10) Section trace (J0) (11) Far End Block Error (M1) (12) Synchronization status byte (S1)

FERF = Far End Receive Failure MSP = Multiplex Section Protection

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-17

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

Table 1.6 - Digital Processing (continued) Description

For Radio

SDH frame to Radio frame conversion Radio frame complementary Overhead (RFCOH) insertion and detection (1) Route ID (2) Radio protection switch (RPS) initiator (3) Digital service channel (4) RPS control signal (5) Far end control signal (6) Way side traffic (7) ATPC Control signal

Scrambling

215–1 patterns

Route ID

16 addresses pre-settable

ATPC = Automatic Transmit Power Control

1-18

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.13

Overall Table 1.7 – Overall Description

Up-fade BER

BER = 10–3 at RSL of –17 dBm measured at MSTU input

Down-fade BER

For 64 QAM MLCM (Figure 1.9): BER = 10–3 at RSL of –76.5 dBm typical BER = 10–3 at RSL of –74.5 dBm guaranteed BER = 10–6 at RSL of –73.5 dBm typical BER = 10–6 at RSL of –70.5 dBm guaranteed Measured at MSTU input For 128 QAM MLCM (Figure 1.10): BER = 10–3 at RSL of –74.0 dBm typical BER = 10–3 at RSL of –72.0 dBm guaranteed BER = 10–6 at RSL of –71.0 dBm typical BER = 10–6 at RSL of –68.0 dBm guaranteed Measured at MSTU input Note 1 : Space Diversity improves RSL by 2 dB. Note 2 : RSL is 1.0 dB higher for 11 GHz and 2.5 dB higher for 13 GHz. Note 3 : Down-fade BER at point B is as follows. 64QAM Figure 1.11 128QAM CC Figure 1.12 128QAM AP (7/13GHz) Figure 1.13

Residual BER

BER < Typical:10–13 /hop/day at normal receiving condition Guaranteed:10–12 /hop/day at normal receiving condition

RSL = Receive Signal Level

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-19

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

BER=10-3 at RSL=-74.5 dBm (Guaranteed) -3

10

-76.5 dBm

Typical curve

BER

-73.5 dBm BER=10-6 at RSL=-70.5 dBm (Guaranteed)

-6

10

-78

76

74

-72

-70

-68

[dBm]

Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point A (MSTU input) Figure 1.9 BER vs RSL (64 QAM system) (Down-fade)

1-20

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

BER=10-3 at RSL=-72 dBm (Guaranteed) 10-3 -74.0 dBm

Typical curve BER

-71.0 dBm -6

BER=10 at RSL=-68 dBm (Guaranteed) 10-6

-76

-74

-72

-70

-68

-66

[dBm]

Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point A (MSTU input) Figure 1.10 BER vs RSL (128 QAM system) (Down-fade) SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-21

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

10 -2

RSL - BER Mask at point B (64QAM CC)

11G

10 -3

U6G

5G

10

-4

at A

4G

10 -5

10 -6

ETSI

10

-7

10

-8

ETSI 11G

10 -9 10 -10 10 -11 -80 10

11

12

13

14

-70 15 16 RSL (dBm)

17

18

19

-60 20

Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point B Figure 1.11 BER vs RSL (64 QAM system)

(Down-fade)

1-22

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 10 -2

RSL - BER Mask at point B (128QAM CC)

10 -3

U4G

10 -4

L6G

L8G

10 -5

at A

10

-6

ETSI

10 -7

10

-8

10 -9 10 -10 10 -11 -80 10

11

12

13

14

-70 15 16 RSL (dBm)

17

18

19

-60 20

Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point B Figure 1.12 BER vs RSL (128 QAM system) (Down-fade)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-23

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

10 -2

RSL - BER Mask at point B (128QAM AP)

10 -3

L7G

10 -4 U7G

13G

10

-5

10

-6

at A

ETSI

10 -7 ETSI 13G

10

-8

10 -9 10 -10 10 -11 -80 10

11

12

13

14

-70 15 16 RSL (dBm)

17

18

19

-60 20

Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point B Figure 1.13 BER vs RSL (128 QAM system) (Down-fade)

1-24

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.14

RF Interference Table 1.8 - RF Interference Description

Co-channel

BER = 10–3 at C/I = 22 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 25 dB for 128 QAM MLCM measured at duplexer input and RSL of –50 dBm

Adjacent channel

BER = 10–3 at C/I = 33 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 30 dB for 128 QAM MLCM measured at duplexer input and RSL of –50 dBm

Innermost channel

C/N degradation at BER = 10–3 : < 1 dB measured at duplexer input and Inter-Port Isolation (IPI) of 40 dB

XPIC

Improvement factor using XPIC for co-channel operation = 18 dB measured at BER = 10–3 interference curve

The following is the RF waveguide interface to/from the antenna system;

Frequency band

Flange (IEC standard)

4 GHz band

UDR 40

5 GHz band

UDR 48

L6 GHz band

UDR 70

7 GHz

UDR 70

U6 GHz band

UDR 70

L8 GHz band

UDR 84

11 GHz band

UDR 100

13 GHz band

UDR 120

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-25

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.15

UMN

Countermeasures to Fading Table 1.9 - Countermeasures to Fading Description

SD

In Phase combiner in IF stage LO endless phase shifter

SD DADE Method

Two types are available; Compensation with RF feeder length (equivalent to 25 m), or Compensation with delay adjuster at IF (equivalent to 100 ns). SD DADE is adjusted through the delay line on the MSTU unit.

Adaptive Equalizer

Adaptive time domain equalizer in baseband 20 tap full digital type (a) 10-tap transversal equalizer (TVE) (b) 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) Adaptive frequency domain equalizer in IF (a) Slope equalizer (SLP EQL)

XPIC

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is inside the Demodulator module (optionally configure for co-channel operation only)

FEC

Multi-Level Coded Modulation(MLCM) Coding gain for 64QAM MLCM:

2.0 dB at BER=10–3 3.5 dB at BER=10–6

Coding gain for 128QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=10–3 3.7 dB at BER=10–6 ATPC

1-26

ATPC range: 10 dB Control speed: 100 dB/sec

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.16 1.2.16.1

Signal Interface for STM-1 System Base Band Signal Interface The Base Band Signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T G.957 and G.703 Recs.

1.2.16.2

Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface

Table 1.10 - Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface (OPT INTF unit) Bit Rate

SDH level 1

Unit Name

OPT INTF 1

Application code (ITU-T G.957)

155.52 Mbit/s ± 20 ppm OPT INTF 2

(S-1.1)

(L-1.1)

0-15 Km

15-40 Km

1260-1360

1280-1335

MLM

MLM

7.7

4.0

Mean launched power: Maximum(dBm) Minimum (dBm)

–8 –15

0 –5

Mi Bit rate minimum extinction ratio (dB)

8.2

10

Optical path between S & R: Attenuation range (dB) Maximum dispersion (ps/nm)

0–12 96

10–28 N/A

Optical path between S and R: Attenuation range

0-12

10-28

Maximum dispersion (ps/nm)

96

186

Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including and connectors (dB)

NA

NA

Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R

NA

NA

Minimum sensitivity (dBm)

–28

–34

Minimum overload

–8

–10

Maximum optical path penalty (including chirp penalty and dispersion penalty (dB)

1

1

NA

NA

Typical hop Operation wavelength range (nm) Transmitter at reference point S: Source type * Spectral characteristics: Maximum RMS width (nm) Maximum –20 dB width (nm) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)

Receiving at reference point R

Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R (dB) Connector Used

SC type or FC type

* Note : MLM = Multi-Longitudinal Mode SLM = Single-Longitudinal Mode

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-27

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.2.16.3

UMN

Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface

Table 1.11 - Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface (BSW unit) Bit rate

155.52 Mbit/s ± 20 ppm

Code format

Coded Mark Inversion (CMI)

Pulse mask

In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703

Impedance

75-ohm nominal, unbalanced

Return loss

> 15 dB / 8~240 MHz, measured at base band input port

Input cable length

The attenuation of the coaxial cable pair should be assumed to follow an approximately root √f law and to have a maximum insertion loss of 12.7 dB at a frequency of 78 MHz.

Coaxial cable

2.5C-QEW or equivalent

Connector used

27CP coaxial connector is standard. Other connectors are available at customer's request.

1.2.16.4

Jitter Jitter tolerance The SRT 1F radio equipment tolerates the input jitter applied according to ITU-T Rec. G.958 with Type A specified on Table 2. Jitter transfer The SRT 1F radio equipment meets the jitter transfer specification given in ITU-T Rec. G.958 Figure 6.2 with the jitter transfer parameter specified for Type B in Table 1/G.958 when sinusoidal jitter up to the mask level in Figure 6.3/G.958 with the jitter tolerance parameter specified for Type A in Table 2/G.958 is applied at the STM-1 input.

1.2.16.5

Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Terminal When the Base Band signal (optical/electrical) or radio signal from the optical equipment or radio equipment is lost, the SRT 1F generates a AU- AIS (MS mode) or a MS-AIS (RS mode) to the next equipment When the AU-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT 1F transfer the AU-AIS to the next equipment after SOH processing. When MS-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT 1F transfers MS-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH processing (in case of RS operation), and transfers AU-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH and MSOH processing (in case of MS operation).

1-28

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Repeater When frame or signal loss is detected, the SRT 1F generates MS-AIS to the next equipment 1.2.16.6

BSI Transmission Transparent transmission (BSI transmission). The property of a binary transmission channel, telecommunication circuit or connection, that permits all sequences of binary signal elements to be conveyed over it at its specified bit rate, without change to the value of any signal elements.

1.2.17

Auxiliary Signal Interface

1.2.17.1

Radio User Channel (RUC) Table 1.12 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (RUC)

Transmission -

Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH bits

Bit rate

64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) per system

Interface

Combination of VF and 64 kbit/s available by mounting optional sub-PCB module on the SV units.

VF interface

Input level : –16 dBr nominal (–16 to-0.5 dBr, 0.5 step) Output level: +7 dBr nominal (–8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step) Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo No. of CH

Maximum 2 CH

Amplitude response:

In accordance with ITU-T G.712

Signal-to-distortion:

In accordance with ITU-T G.712

Impedance

600-Ω balanced

Digital interface

Interface: Co-directional or contra-directional

Connector used

Multi-pin connector

1.2.17.2

Way Side (WS) Table 1.13 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (WS)

Capacity

2048 kbit/s x 2 per STM-1

Transmission

Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH and/or SOH bits One wayside traffic is transferred through RFCOH bits, the other is through undefined bytes in SOH

Digital interface

In accordance with ITU-T G.703 Rec.

Connector used

Multi-pin connector for 120 Ω balanced Coaxial connector, 27CP for 75 Ω unbalanced

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-29

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.2.17.3

UMN

Order Wire (OW) Table 1.14 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (OW)

Transmission

Bit insertion/separation to/from E1 and E2 of SOH.

Bit rate

64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) Express orderwire and omnibus orderwire

Interface

2-W for internal telephone set and external use 4-W for branching connector

Interface level

2W Interface Input level : 0.0 dBr nominal Output level : –2.0 dBr nominal Voice maximum level:

3 dBmo

4W Interface Input level : –4 dBr nominal (–16 to –0.5 dBr, 0.5 step) Output level : –4 dBr nominal (–8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step) Voice maximum level:

1.2.17.4

3 dBmo

User Channel (UC) Table 1.15 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (User Channel)

Transmission

Bit insertion/separation to/from F1 byte of SOH.

Bit rate

64 kbit/s x 1 (equivalent to 1 CH telephony) per STM-1

Interface

64 kbit/s

Interface

Interface : Co-directional or contra directional Pulse mask: In accordance with ITU-T G.703

Connector used

1-30

Multi-pin connector

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.3 1.3.1

Mechanical Specification General Rack has dimension as follows: •

2200 mm height

•

600 mm width

•

300 mm depth

342.5*1 300

600

RF Branching Network Unit

MSTU

Main Signal Transmission Unit

2200

BRU

SCSU

BBIU

Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit

Base-Band Interface Unit (option)

1 * The dimensions include all protruding parts

Figure 1.14 - Front view of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-31

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.3.2

UMN

Rack construction It consists of: •

Rack

•

RF Branching network part (BRU block)

•

Shelves with PCB backplane (MSTU/SCSU blocks)

•

Optional shelf with PCB backplane (BBIU blocks)

•

Slide-in-units(SIU)

The following connectors and power supply terminals are on the PCB backplane: •

Multi-pin and co-axial connectors for data

•

Multi-pin connectors for alarm and status output for housekeeping bits

•

Power supply terminal from power supply system.

The shelves comprise the main signal transmission unit (MSTU), supervisory control and switching unit (SCSU), baseband interface unit (BBIU) and RF branching network unit (BRU). A multi-layer PCB backplane is used for plug-in units. Multi-pin connectors on the backplane have high-reliability features and are provided with facilities which prevent wrong insertion. The BBIU shelf is used only for terminal configuration with optical interface. The RF branching network is housed above the MSTU shelf. The RF branching network consists of RF band pass filters and, circulators for channel separation. The RF branching network and the MSTU units are connected through semi-rigid coaxial cables with SMA coaxial connectors via an MSTU adapter. All units are of the plug-in type hence needing no wiring during the installation and maintenance works. Units have card-pullers for easy card extraction and unit locking. All units can be accessed through front panel.

1.3.3

Inter-Rack Connections Inter-rack cabling and connections are made on the PCB backplane through multi-pin connectors.

1-32

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.3.4

Rack Layout Typical rack configurations for terminal and repeater stations are shown in Figure 1.15 and Figure 1.16. The terminal equipment has the following facilities; •

One BRU

•

Maximum eight (8) MSTUs (8 RF system) per rack

•

One SCSU

•

One optional BBIU for STM-1 Optical interface

The repeater equipment (one-end) has the following facilities; •

One BRU

•

Maximum eight (8) MSTUs (8 RF system) per rack

•

One SCSU

Vertical (V) and Horizontal (H) polarization

BRU

MSTU

SCSU

BBIU

Figure 1.15 - (7+1) Alternated operation Terminal Station

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-33

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

A co-channel operating terminal station (up to 1+7 system) consists of two (2) equipment racks of opposite polarization as shown in Figure 1.16.

V-polarization

H-polarization

BRU

MSTU

SCSU

BBIU

Figure 1.16 - 2 x (7+1) Co-channel operating Terminal Station

1-34

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.3.5

Unit Layout Figure 1.17 shows the unit layout on the MSTU shelf. Maximum eight (8) MSTU units can be mounted in one MSTU.

Figure 1.17 - Front view of the MSTU shelf Figure 1.18 shows the unit layout on the SCSU. One block can accomodate, one SV unit, one TCU unit, and maximum seven (7) BSW units. In addition to the above units, one back-up TCU unit, two HK units, one OCC INTF unit, and two ECU units can be optionally mounted.

RPS Group 1

RPS Group 2

Figure 1.18 - Front view of the SCSU shelf

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-35

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

Figure 1.19 shows the unit layout on the BBIU for STM-1 optical interface. One block can accomodate, a maximum of fifteen (15) OPT INTF units, seven (7) MSP SW units, and one BBC unit.

Figure 1.19 - Front view of the STM-1 optical interface BBIU shelf

1-36

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.4

Environmental Specification Temperature and Humidity Performance guaranteed within the solid line below Temperature (°C) 45 35

10 0

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90 95

Relative Humidity (%)

Short term operation

–5 to 50ºC Note : Short term is defined as a period not exceeding 72 consecutive hours or a total of 15 days per year. In this case equipment is operable, but performance is not guaranteed

Storage/shipping

Temperature: –20ºC to +55ºC, Humidity: 0% to 95% (@35ºC) Altitude

Performance guaranteed

Up to 3,500 meters

Storage/shipping

Up to 15,000 meters

Vibration In accordance with ETSI

Electro-Magnetic Compatibility Electrostatic discharge IEC 801-2

Level 3 (4 kV direct discharge) without any malfunction

Radiated emission

In accordance with CISPR Pub.22 CLASS A, 10m method

Level 4 (8 kV direct discharge) with some degraded performance, but without damage < 39.5 dB µV/m for 30.0 to 230.0 MHz < 46.5 dB µV/m for 230.0 to 1000.0 MHz

Conducted emission

In accordance with CISPR Pub.22 CLASS A < 66 dB µV/m for 0.15 to 0.5 MHz (average energy) < 60 dB µV/m for 0.5 to 30.0 MHz (average energy)

Radiated susceptibility

In accordance with IEC 801-3 3 V/m, swept 80 MHz to 1 GHz without any malfunction

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-37

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.5

UMN

Power Requirements

1.5.1

General All the equipment is DC power supplied with positive ground. DC input voltage, –48V (–36 V to –72 V) is available. The power supply circuits of all the equipment provide the following: •

Over current protection (Secondary)

•

Over voltage protection (Secondary)

•

Surge protection (Primary) :

•

Rise and fall time (Vp/2) : tr = 1.2 µ sec, tf = 50 µ sec.

Vp = 2 kV

A power supply switch with non-fuse breaker is located on each MSTU, SCSU, and BBIU.

1.5.2

Unit Power Consumption The power consumption of each unit is shown in Table 1.16 - Power Consumption of each unit.

Table 1.16 - Power Consumption of each unit No.

Unit

Pc (W)

Remarks

1

MSTU without XPIC

170

+ 32 dBm output with SD

2

MSTU with XPIC

173

+ 32 dBm output with SD

3

SV

20

4

TCU

10

5

BSW

1.3/9*

secondary +5V from MSTU-P

6

BSW INTF

1.4

secondary +5V from MSTU-P

7

HK (optional unit)

3.2

secondary +5V from SV

8

ECU (optional unit)

2

secondary +5V from SV

9

OPT INTF (optional unit)

24

10

PE INTF (optional unit)

27

11

BBC (optional unit)

4.3

12.

MSP SW (optional unit)

0.3

1

secondary +5V from OPT INTF

Note1: Under working of protection channel. Note: Unit power consumption includes efficiency of power supply module. (80 %)

1-38

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.6 1.6.1

Frequency Plan and Antenna System General Information Table 1.17 shows the ITU-R recommendations for the radio frequency plan. Table 1.17 - ITU-R Recommendations. Band

1.6.2

Recommendation

U4 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.382-6

4 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.635-3

5 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.1099 Annex-1

L6 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.383-5

U6 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.384-5

L7 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.385-6

U7 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.385-6

L8 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.386-4

11 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.387-6

13 GHz band

ITU-R Recommendation F.497-4

Frequency Plan The frequency allocation for the Upper 4 GHz band is as follows: •

3803.5 to 4203.5 MHz

•

Center frequency 4003.5 MHz

•

Guard band 21 MHz (Lower band and upper band)

•

Center gap 68 MHz

•

29 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 58 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

213 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

5+1 protection system for alternated 2×(5+1) protection system for co-channel operation

•

Specified RF frequency shown in Figure 1.20.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

operation)

operation

1-39

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

The frequency allocation for the 4 GHz band is as follows: •

3600 to 4200 MHz

•

Center frequency 3900 MHz

•

Guard band 20 MHz (Lower band and upper band)

•

Center gap 80 MHz

•

40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

320 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

6+1 protection system for alternated 2×(6+1) protection system for co-channel operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.21

operation)

operation

The frequency allocation for the 5 GHz band is as follows: •

4400 to 5000 MHz

•

Center frequency 4700 MHz

•

Guard band 30 MHz (Lower band and upper band)

•

Center gap 60 MHz

•

40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

300 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

6+1 protection system for alternated 2×(6+1) protection system for co-channel operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.22

operation)

operation

The frequency allocation for the Lower 6 GHz band is as follows:

1-40

•

5925 to 6425 MHz

•

Center frequency 6175 MHz

•

Guard band 20.2 MHz (Lower band) and 20.21 MHz (Upper band)

•

Center gap 44.49 MHz

•

29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

252.04 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

7+1 protection system for alternated 2×(7+1)protection system for co-channel operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.23

operation)

operation

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The frequency allocation for the Upper 6 GHz band is as follows: •

6430 to 7110 MHz

•

Center frequency 6770 MHz

•

Guard band 30 MHz (Lower band and upper band)

•

Center gap 60 MHz

•

40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

340 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

7+1 protection system for alternated 2×(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.24

operation)

operation

The frequency allocation for the Lower 7 GHz band is as follows: •

7125 to 7425 MHz

•

Center frequency 7275 MHz

•

Guard band 10 MHz (Lower band) and 17 MHz (Upper band)

•

Center gap 49 MHz

•

56 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

161 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

4+1 protection system for alternated operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.25

The frequency allocation for the Upper 7 GHz band is as follows: •

7425 to 7725 MHz

•

Center frequency 7575 MHz

•

Guard band 17 MHz (Lower band and upper band)

•

Center gap 42 MHz

•

56 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

154 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

4+1 protection system for alternated operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.26

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-41

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

The frequency allocation for the Lower 8 GHz band is as follows: •

7725 to 8275 MHz

•

Center frequency 8000 MHz

•

Guard band

•

Center gap 103.77 MHz

•

29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

311.32 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

7+1 protection system for alternated 2×(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.27

operation)

operation

The frequency allocation for the Lower 11 GHz band is as follows: •

10700 to 11700 MHz

•

Center frequency 11200 MHz

•

Guard band 15 MHz for 12 pair system

•

Center gap 90 MHz for 12 pair system

•

40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

530 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

7+1 protection system for alternated 2×(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.28

operation)

operation

The frequency allocation for the Lower 13 GHz band is as follows:

1-42

•

12750 to 13250 MHz

•

Center frequency 12996 MHz

•

Guard band 15 MHz (Lower band) and 23 MHz (Upper band)

•

Center gap 70 MHz

•

56 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation)

•

266 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing

•

7+1 protection system for alternated operation

•

Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.29.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.1

U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6) Alternated operation 400 MHz 213 MHz

21 MHz

58 MHz

1

2

3

4

21 MHz

5

6

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

V(H) H(V) 68 MHz 29 MHz

Co-channel operation 400 MHz 213 MHz 21 MHz

58 MHz

21 MHz

1

2

3

4

5

6

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6x

1x’

2x’

3x’

4x’

5x’

6x’

V(H) H(V)

29 MHz 68 MHz

Figure 1.20 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)

Table 1.18 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6) RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

3824.5

2980.5

2

3853.5

3009.5

3

3882.5

3038.5

4

3911.5

3067.5

5

3940.5

3096.5

6

3969.5

3125.5

1'

4037.5

3193.5

2'

4066.5

3222.5

3'

4095.5

3251.5

4'

4124.5

3280.5

5'

4153.5

3309.5

6'

4182.5

3338.5

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-43

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.2

UMN

4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)

Alternated operation 600 MHz 320 MHz 20 MHz

80 MHz

1

2

3

4

20 MHz

5

6

7

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

V(H) H(V) 80 MHz 40 MHz

Co-channel operation 600 MHz 320 MHz 20 MHz

80MHz

20 MHz

1

2

3

4

5

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6

7

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

1x’

2x’

3x’

4x’

5x’

6x’

7x’

V(H) H(V) 6x

7x

40 MHz 80 MHz

Figure 1.21 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)

Table 1.19 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)

1-44

RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

3620.0

2776.0

2

3660.0

2816.0

3

3700.0

2856.0

4

3740.0

2896.0

5

3780.0

2936.0

6

3820.0

2976.0

7

3860.0

3016.0

1’

3940.0

3096.0

2’

3980.0

3136.0

3’

4020.0

3176.0

4’

4060.0

3216.0

5’

4100.0

3256.0

6’

4140.0

3296.0

7’

4180.0

3336.0

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.3

5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1)

Alternated operation 600 MHz 300 MHz 30 MHz

80 MHz

1

2

3

30 MHz

4

5

6

7

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

V(H) H(V) 60 MHz 40 MHz

Co-channel operation 600 MHz 300 MHz 30 MHz

80MHz

1

2

3

1x

2x

3x

30 MHz

4

5

4x

5x

6

7

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

1x’

2x’

3x’

4x’

5x’

6x’

7x’

V(H) H(V) 6x

7x

40 MHz 60 MHz

Figure 1.22 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1) Table 1.20 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1) RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

4430.0

3586.0

2

4470.0

3626.0

3

4510.0

3666.0

4

4550.0

3706.0

5

4590.0

3746.0

6

4630.0

3786.0

7

4670.0

3826.0

1’

4730.0

3886.0

2’

4770.0

3926.0

3’

4810.0

3966.0

4’

4850.0

4006.0

5’

4890.0

4046.0

6’

4930.0

4086.0

7’

4970.0

4126.0

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-45

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.4

UMN

L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5)

Alternated operation 500 MHz 252.04 MHz 20.2 MHz

59.3 MHz

1 8

2

3

20.21 MHz

4

5

6

7

1’ 8’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

V(H) H(V) 44.49 MHz 29.65 MHz

Co-channel operation 500 MHz 252.04 MHz 20.2 MHz

59.3 MHz

1 8

2

3

1x 8

2x

3x

20.21 MHz

4

5

6

7

1’ 8’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

1x’ 8 ’

2x’

3x’

4x’

5x’

6x’

7x’

V(H) H(V) 4x

5x

6x

7x

29.65 MHz 44.49 MHz

Figure 1.23 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5) Table 1.21 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5)

1-46

RF CH

RF FREQUENCY (MHz)

LO FREQUENCY (MHz)

1

5945.20

5101.20

2

5974.85

5130.85

3

6004.50

5160.50

4

6034.15

5190.15

5

6063.80

5219.80

6

6093.45

5249.45

7

6123.10

5279.10

8

6152.75

5308.75

1’

6197.24

5353.24

2’

6226.89

5382.89

3’

6256.54

5412.54

4’

6286.19

5442.19

5’

6315.84

5471.84

6’

6345.49

5501.49

7’

6375.14

5531.14

8’

6404.79

5560.79

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.5

U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)

Alternated operation 680 MHz 340 MHz 30 MHz

80 MHz

1 8

2

3

30 MHz

4

5

6

7

1’ 8’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

V(H) H(V) 60 MHz 40 MHz

Co-channel operation 680 MHz 340 MHz 30 MHz

30 MHz

30 MHz

1 8

2

3

4

5

1x 8

2x

3x

4x

5x

6

7

1’ 8’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

1x’ 8 ’

2x’

3x’

4x’

5x’

6x’

7x’

V(H) H(V) 6x

7x

40 MHz 60 MHz

Figure 1.24 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5) Table 1.22 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5) RF CH

RF Frequency (MHz)

LO Frequency MHz)

1

6460.0

5616.0

2

6500.0

5656.0

3

6540.0

5696.0

4

6580.0

5736.0

5

6620.0

5776.0

6

6660.0

5816.0

7

6700.0

5856.0

8

6740.0

5896.0

1’

6800.0

5956.0

2’

6840.0

5996.0

3’

6880.0

6036.0

4’

6920.0

6076.0

5’

6960.0

6116.0

6’

7000.0

6156.0

7’

7040.0

6196.0

8’

7080.0

6236.0

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-47

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.6

UMN

L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6) Alternated operation 300 MHz 161 MHz

10 MHz

56 MHz

1

2

3

4

17MHz

5

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

V(H) H(V) 49 MHz 28 MHz

Figure 1.25 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)

Table 1.23 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)

1-48

RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

7135

6291

2

7163

6319

3

7191

6347

4

7219

6375

5

7247

6403

1’

7296

6452

2’

7324

6480

3’

7352

6508

4’

7380

6536

5’

7408

6564

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.7

U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6) Alternated operation 300 MHz 154 MHz

17 MHz

56 MHz

1

2

3

4

17MHz

5

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

V(H) H(V) 42 MHz 28 MHz

Figure 1.26 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6) Table 1.24 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6) RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

7442

6598

2

7470

6626

3

7498

6654

4

7526

6682

5

7554

6710

1’

7596

6752

2’

7624

6780

3’

7652

6808

4’

7680

6836

5’

7708

6864

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-49

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.8

UMN

L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4)

Alternated operation 550 MHz 311.32 MHz 22.7 MHz

59.3 MHz

1

2

3

4

8.43 MHz

5

6

7

8

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

8’

V(H) H(V) 103.77 MHz 29.65 MHz

Co-channel operation 550 MHz 311.32 MHz 22.7 MHz

59.3 MHz

8.43MHz

1

2

3

4

5

1x

2x

3x

4x

5x

6

7

8

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

8’

2x’

3x’

4x’

5x’

6x’

7x’

8x’

V(H) H(V) 6x

7x

8x

1x’

29.65 MHz 103.77 MHz

Figure 1.27 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4) Table 1.25 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4)

1-50

RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

7747.70

6903.70

2

7777.35

6933.35

3

7807.00

6963.00

4

7836.65

6992.65

5

7866.30

7022.30

6

7895.95

7051.95

7

7925.60

7081.60

8

7955.25

7111.25

1’

8059.02

7215.02

2’

8088.67

7244.67

3’

8118.32

7274.32

4’

8147.97

7303.97

5’

8177.62

7333.62

6’

8207.27

7363.27

7’

8236.92

7392.92

8’

8266.57

7422.57

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.9

11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6)

Alternated operation 1000 MHz 530 MHz 15 MHz

80 MHz

1

2

3

15MHz

4

10

11

12

1’

2’

3’

4’

10’

11’

12’

V(H) H(V) 90 MHz 40 MHz

Co-channel operation 1000 MHz 530 MHz 15 MHz

80 MHz

15MHz

1

2

3

4

10

11

1x

2x

3x

4x

10x

12

1’

2’

3’

4’

10’

11’

12’

1x’

2x’

3x’

4x’

10x’

11x’

12x’

V(H) H(V) 11x

12x

40 MHz 90 MHz

Figure 1.28 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) Table 1.26 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

10715.0

9871.0

2

10755.0

9911.0

3

10795.0

9951.0

4

10835.0

9991.0

5

10875.0

10031.0

6

10915.0

10071.0

7

10955.0

10111.0

8

10995.0

10151.0

9

11035.0

10191.0

10

11075.0

10231.0

11

11115.0

10271.0

12

11155.0

10311.0

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-51

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN

Table 1.27 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) (Continued)

1-52

RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1’

11245.0

10401.0

2’

11285.0

10441.0

3’

11325.0

10481.0

4’

11365.0

10521.0

5’

11405.0

10561.0

6’

11445.0

10601.0

7’

11485.0

10641.0

8’

11525.0

10681.0

9’

11565.0

10721.0

10’

11605.0

10761.0

11’

11645.0

10801.0

12’

11685.0

10841.0

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.6.3

13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4)

Alternated operation 500MHz 266 MHz 15 MHz

56 MHz

1

2

3

4

23 MHz

5

6

7

8

1’

2’

3’

4’

5’

6’

7’

8’

V(H) H(V) 70 MHz 28 MHz

Figure 1.29 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4) Table 1.28 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4) RF CH

RF FREQUENCY(MHz)

LO FREQUENCY(MHz)

1

12765

11921

2

12793

11949

3

12821

11977

4

12849

12005

5

12877

12033

6

12905

12061

7

12933

12089

8

12961

12117

1’

13031

12187

2’

13059

12215

3’

13087

12243

4’

13115

12271

5’

13143

12299

6’

13171

12327

7’

13199

12355

8’

13227

12383

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-53

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.6.4

UMN

RF Branching Network The RF branching network for alternate operation is shown in Figure 1.30 to Figure 1.31. Figure 1.30 shows (7+1) BRU with SD for alternated operation using a dual polarization antenna. When expansion of this system is requested, co-channel operation will be applied. Figure 1.31 shows 2×(7+1) BRU with SD for co-channel operation.

1-54

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Vertical or Horizontal polarization V-TRANSMIT SIDE

ch-1 MTSU ch-1 (Transmitter)

BPF CIR BPF ch-5

MTSU ch-5 (Transmitter)

BEF

ch-5’

MTSU ch-7 (Transmitter)

MTSU ch-5’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-2’ (SD receiver)

MTSU ch-7’ (SD receiver)

MTSU ch-6’ (SD receiver)

MAIN ANT

BEF

MTSU ch-7’ (MN receiver)

ch-4’

BPF CIR BPF ch-6’

MTSU ch-1’ (MN receiver)

ch-7’

BPF CIR BPF ch-2’

MTSU ch-3’ (SD receiver)

ch-1’

BPF CIR BPF ch-5’

ch-7’

BPF CIR BPF

(SD receiver)

MTSU ch-3’ (MN receiver)

ch-3’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-5’

ch-3’

MTSU ch-3 (Transmitter)

ch-7

BPF CIR BPF ch-1’

MTSU ch-1’ (SD receiver)

ch-3

H or V

V-RECEIVE SIDE

DUP

V or H

MTSU ch-4’ (SD receiver)

ch-8’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-8’ (SD receiver)

V or H Horizontal or Vertical polarization H-TRANSMIT SIDE

ch-4 MTSU ch-4 (Transmitter)

BPF CIR BPF ch-8

MTSU ch-8 (Transmitter)

ch-2

BEF

ch-2’

MTSU ch-2 (Transmitter)

MTSU ch-2’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-6 (Transmitter)

MTSU ch-6’ (MN receiver)

ch-6

BPF CIR BPF

SD ANT

H-RECEIVE SIDE

DUP

ch-4’

BPF CIR BPF ch-6’

H or V

MTSU ch-4’ (MN receiver)

ch-8’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-8’ (MN receiver)

BRU

Figure 1.30 - (7+1) BRU for alternated operation

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1-55

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

UMN Vertical or Horizontal polarization

V or H H or V

ch-1 MTSU ch-1 (Transmitter)

BPF CIR BPF ch-2

MTSU ch-2 (Transmitter)

ch-5

ch-8

BEF

ch-2’

MTSU ch-2’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-7 (Transm itter)

MTSU ch-5’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-6 (Transm itter)

MTSU ch-6’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-4’ (SD receiver)

MTSU ch-6’ (SD receiver)

ch-4’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-4’ (MN receiver)

ch-7’ BEF

MTSU ch-8’ (MN receiver)

ch-7’ MTSU ch-7’ (SD receiver)

BPF CIR BPF ch-6’

MTSU ch-7’ (MN receiver)

ch-8’

BPF CIR BPF

ch-5’

MTSU ch-1’ (MN receiver)

ch-4’

BPF CIR BPF ch-6’

MTSU ch-5’ (SD receiver)

BEF

BPF CIR BPF ch-5’

MTSU ch-3’ (SD receiver)

MAIN ANT

ch-1’

BPF CIR BPF ch-2’

ch-3’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-2’ (SD receiver)

MTSU ch-4 (Transm itter)

ch-6

BPF CIR BPF

ch-1’ MTSU ch-1’ (SD receiver)

MTSU ch-3’ (MN receiver)

ch-7

BPF CIR BPF

BEF

ch-3’

MTSU ch-3 (Transm itter)

ch-4

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-5 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-8 (Transmitter)

ch-3

DUP

ch-8’ MTSU ch-8’ (SD receiver)

BPF CIR BPF

V or H

BRU-1

H or V Horizontal or Vertical polarization

ch-1 MTSU ch-1 (Transmitter)

ch-3

BPF CIR BPF ch-2

MTSU ch-2 (Transmitter)

ch-5

ch-8 BEF

MTSU ch-1’ (SD receiver)

BEF

ch-2’

MTSU ch-2’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-7 (Transm itter)

MTSU ch-5’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-6 (Transm itter)

MTSU ch-6’ (MN receiver)

MTSU ch-4’ (SD receiver)

MTSU ch-6’ (SD receiver)

ch-4’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-4’ (MN receiver)

ch-7’ MTSU ch-7’ (MN receiver) MTSU ch-8’ (MN receiver)

ch-7’

BPF CIR BPF ch-6’

BEF

ch-8’

BPF CIR BPF

ch-5’

MTSU ch-1’ (MN receiver)

ch-4’

BPF CIR BPF ch-6’

MTSU ch-5’ (SD receiver)

BEF

BPF CIR BPF ch-5’

MTSU ch-3’ (SD receiver)

ch-1’

BPF CIR BPF ch-2’

ch-3’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-2’ (SD receiver)

MTSU ch-4 (Transm itter)

ch-6

BPF CIR BPF

ch-1’

MTSU ch-3’ (MN receiver)

ch-7

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-8 (Transmitter)

ch-3’

MTSU ch-3 (Transm itter)

ch-4

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-5 (Transmitter)

DUP

SD ANT

MTSU ch-7’ (SD receiver)

ch-8’

BPF CIR BPF

MTSU ch-8’ (SD receiver)

BRU-2

Figure 1.31 - 2× ×(7+1) BRU with SD for co-channel operation

1-56

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 2.1 2.1.1

Equipment Configurations and Features SRT 1F System The SRT 1F radio equipment is designed to transmit STM-1 (155.520 Mb/s) signals. The SRT 1F is equipped with N+1 Radio Protection System (RPS). Possible configurations of the SRT 1F are: •

Terminal with STM-1 Electrical Interface (SE INTF).

•

Terminal with STM-1 Optical Interface with Multiplex Section Protection (OPT INTF with MSP)).

•

Terminal with STM-1 Optical Interface without Multiplex Section Protection (OPT INTF without MSP).

The SRT 1F consists of four functional blocks: •

BRU: Branching Network Unit with RF filters, circulators and a duplexer for RF combining/branching and interface to/from the antenna system.

•

MSTU: Main Signal Transmission Unit with Transmitter (TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions.

•

SCSU: Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit with Supervisory (SV), Bipolar Switch (BSW), Timing Control (TCU), Embedded Communication (ECU) and Housekeeping (HK) functions.

•

BBIU: Base-Band Interface Unit with Baseband Interface for STM-1 Optical. Multiplex Section Protection Switches (MSPSW) are also accommodated in this unit. The BBIU is optional for the Terminal with OPT INTF.

Figure 2.1 shows the standard equipment layout.

2.1.2

Terminal The SRT 1F consists of Terminal equipment The terminal equipment has full facilities; signal transmission, protection switching and baseband interface.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-1

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

BRU

BRU

Branching Network Unit

MSTU1

MSTU2

MSTU3

MSTU4

MSTU5

MSTU6

MSTU7

MSTU8

[P]

[M1]

[M2]

[M3]

[M4]

[M5]

[M6]

[M7]

MSTU Main Signal Transmission Unit

SCSU

BSW7

Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit

MSPSW 7

MSPSW 5

SV

ECU2

MSPSW 4

MSPSW 6

ECU1

MSPSW 3

MSPSW 2

MSPSW 1

* OCC INTF

HK2

BSW6

BSW5

HK1

TCU Y

BSW4

BSW2

TCU X

BSW3

BSW1

Connection Area

Connection Area

BBIU (option) BaseBand Interface Unit

BB INTF Y

[M6]

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

[M5]

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

[M4]

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

[M3]

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

[M2]

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF P

BBC

[M1]

BBIU is optional for the Terminal equipment of the Optical interface

[M7]

BB INTF (X/Y) : Figure 2.1 - Standard Equipment Layout (not in scale) OPT INTF (X/Y) for STM-1 Optical Interface with MSP *OPT INTF(X) for STM-1 Optical Interface without MSP

2-2

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.2 shows the Terminal equipment configuration. The BBIU is installed for the Terminal with Optical interface, but not for the STM-1 Electrical interface.

BRU MSTU

SCSU

BRU MSTU

SCSU

BBIU Terminal Equipment with SE INTF

a)

Terminal Equipment with OPT INTF

b)

Figure 2.2 - Equipment Configuration for Terminal

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-3

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.1.3

UMN

Baseband Interface The SRT 1F has three types of baseband interface:

2.1.4

•

SE INTF: STM-1 Electrical Interface, the basic type of interface. The SRT 1F with SE INTF is composed of BRU, MSTU and SCSU. Figure 2.3 shows the schematic diagram.

•

OPT INTF (with MSP): STM-1 Optical Interface Multiplex Section, the type of interface with optical line protection (MSP). The SRT 1F with OPT INTF (MS) is composed of BRU, MSTU, SCSU and BBIU. Figure 2.4 shows the schematic diagram.

•

OPT INTF (without MSP): STM-1 Optical Interface Regenerator Section, the type of interface without optical line protection. The SRT 1F with OPT INTF (RS) is composed of BRU, MSTU, SCSU and BBIU. Figure 2.5 shows the schematic diagram.

Alternated and Co-channel Operation The SRT 1F can provide two frequency allocation systems as follows: •

Alternated operation: An STM-1 signal is transmitted by an RF frequency using single polarization.

•

Co-channel operation: Two STM-1 signals are transmitted simultaneously by an RF frequency using dual polarization. This system is provided as an option to double the spectrum efficiency. The transmission capacity of Way side, User channel and other auxiliary signals will be doubled through this co-channel operation system.

2-4

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.3 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal without SD (Space Diversity).

TDP Prot CH

USW

RDP

USW

STM-1 CMI

BPF

TDP

USW

STM-1 CMI

BPF

USW

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BSW RDP

USW

WS R,S UC(F1)

STM-1 CMI

MOD TX

BSW

WS R,S UC(F1)

Main 3

DEM RX

MSTU

RDP

Main 2

DUP BPF

STM-1 CMI

STM-1 Electrical In/out Main 1

MOD TX

DEM RX

BPF

BPF

MSTU

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW RDP

USW

WS R,S UC(F1)

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU BRU

UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N

STM-1 CMI

RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO

STM-1 Unipolar

NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit

LCT

EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON

Figure 2.3 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal SCSU

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-5

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

Figure 2.4 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP and without SD. This configuration provides Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) for the optical line interface. TDP Prot CH

USW

RDP

BPF

USW

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU OPT INTF

Main 1

MSP SW

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW RDP

OPT INTF

Y

DUP

STM-1 CMI

STM-1 Optical In/out X

MOD TX

USW

DEM RX

BPF

WS R,S

MSTU

UC(F1)

OPT INTF

X Main 2

MSP SW

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BSW RDP

OPT INTF

Y

STM-1 CMI

USW

DEM RX

WS R,S

BPF

BPF

MSTU

UC(F1)

OPT INTF

X Main 3

MSP SW

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW RDP

OPT INTF

Y

STM-1 CMI

USW

DEM RX

BPF

WS R,S

MSTU

UC(F1)

BBIU

BRU

UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N

STM-1 CMI

RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO

STM-1 Unipolar

NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit

LCT

EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON

Figure 2.4 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP SCSU

2-6

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.5 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP and without SD.

TDP Prot CH

USW

MOD TX

DUP BPF

STM-1 CMI RDP

USW

STM-1 Optical In/out

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU

Main 1 OPT INTF

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW

MSP SW

RDP

USW

DEM RX

BPF

WS R,S

UC(F1)

MSTU Main 2 OPT INTF

STM-1 CMI

TDP

RDP UC(F1)

USW

MOD TX

BSW

MSP SW

USW

DEM RX

WS R,S

BPF

BPF

MSTU Main 3 OPT INTF

STM-1 CMI

TDP

RDP UC(F1)

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW

MSP SW

USW

DEM RX

BPF

WS R,S

MSTU BBIU

BRU

UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N

STM-1 CMI

RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO

STM-1 Unipolar

NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit

LCT

EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON

Figure 2.5 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP SCSU

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-7

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

2.2

STM-1 Signal Transmission

2.2.1

STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface SCSU The STM-1 Electrical signal input/output terminals are located on the BSW (Bipolar Switch) front panel on the SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). BBIU Input/output terminals for STM-1 Optical are located on the front panels of the OPT INTF unit of BBIU (Baseband interface unit). The Optical STM-1 is converted to the STM-1 CMI signal and sent to the BSW unit of the SCSU.

2.2.2

Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function) The MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) is composed of Transmitter (TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions. The Unipolar Switch (USW) for the Radio Protection System (RPS) is also a part of the MSTU. SE INTF The STM-1 CMI signal inputs from the BSW unit of SCSU. The incoming STM-1 CMI signal is converted to eight unipolar signal streams and applied to the Transmit Data Processing (TDP) circuit. TDP The TDP circuit processes drop/insert the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) to be terminated from the STM-1 data. The AU-Pointer is also re-written. A Unipolar Switch (USW) provides hitless switching for the Radio Protection System. After the USW, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is applied to the incoming STM-1 signal to compose the Radio Frame. The RFCOH is composed of Radio Frame Alignment, Wayside, Radio Service Channel, RPS Control, Redundancy bit for MLCM and other signals. Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) is provided to perform forward error correction on the data to transmit across the radio section. QAM MOD Module The Radio Frame inputs the QAM Modulator Module (QAM MOD Module). The QAM MOD Module is composed of a spectrum shaping device and a Modulator controller (MOD), the Digital to analog converter (D/A) and the Quadrature Amplitude Modulator (QAM) to generate the QAM signal. The QAM MOD Module output is applied to the Transmit IF (TIF) circuit.

2-8

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION TIF The incoming QAM signal is converted to the 1st IF (70MHz) signal. st The 1 IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then applied to the Linearizer (LNZ). The LNZ works to compensate the distortion which is caused by the non-linearity of the RF transmit circuit. st nd The 1 IF signal is converted to the 2 IF (844MHz) signal, then applied to the Transmit RF Module (TRF Module). TRF Module The TRF accepts the 2nd IF and converts it to the Radio Frequency (RF) by mixing it with the signal outputting from the Local Oscillator Module (LO Module). The RF signal is amplified through RF amplifiers. The MSTU output level is +29 dBm (+ 27 dBm for 13 GHz). It is controlled by the Automatic Level Control (ALC) which keeps it constant against input signal level, amplifier gain and other ambient factor variations. High power version transmitting +32dBm is available from 4 GHz to 8 GHz. Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) can automatically control the MSTU output power within +29 dBm (HIGH) and +19 dBm (LOW) based on the propagation loss across the radio section. The ATPC automatically changes the MSTU output level back to HIGH when the RX receiving level becomes lower than the specified level. ATPC is an option setting through the LCT. This function is provided to save the power drained by the MSTU and improve possible interference on adjacent frequency channels and opposite polarization. The MSTU output is applied to the Branching Network Unit (BRU), then to the antenna. The spurious emission of the transmitter is suppressed by the BRU’s Band-Pass Filter (BPF). LO Module The LO Module is a phase-locked loop oscillator circuit supplying the RF Local signals to the Transmitter and Receiver. The oscillation frequency setting is based on MSTU operation frequency. RRF Module The Receive RF Module (RRF Module) accepts the received RF signal from the antenna through BRU. Receiver selectivity is determined by the BRU’s BPF. The received RF signal (standard level : - 35 dBm, AGC dynamic range: - 17 dBm to - 70s dBm) is amplified by a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), nd nd then converted to the 2 IF (844MHz). The 2 IF signal is amplified and applied to the Receive IF (RIF) circuit. RIF The 2nd IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then converted to the st st 1 IF (70MHz). The 1 IF signal is applied to the DEM circuit. The Rx st amplifiers are Automatically Gain Controlled (AGC) to maintain the 1 IF output level constant against the big variation of the RF Rx level at the MSTU input.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-9

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

AGC current of Main 1 channel can be monitored through connector CN34 on the SCSU shelf for testing and maintenance service. The Mixer (MIX) converts the 1st IF signal down to the QAM signal and applies it to the QAM Demodulator Modulate (QAM DEM Module). QAM DEM Module The QAM DEM Module is composed of the QAM demodulator the Analog to Digital Converter (A/D), the Demodulator controller (DEM), the spectrum shaping device and the Transversal Equalizer (TVE) with Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE). The spectrum shaping device shares spectrum shaping function with the QAM MOD Module of the transmitter side. The TVE with DFE equalizes waveform distortion caused by multi-path fading in the baseband time domain. The radio frame baseband clock signal is recovered from the received IF signal by the QAM DEM Module. The output of QAM DEM Module, the radio frame baseband signal and the clock signal, are sent to the Receive Data Processing (RDP) circuit. RDP The first stage of the RDP is the MLCM decoder. Forward error correction consists in checking redundancy bits contained in the radio frame. Radio parity (RP) bits before error correction, part of the MLCM redundancy bits, are detected to monitor the error performance across the radio section from the modulator to demodulator. Bit Error Ratio of RP deterioration (BER-ALM) is one of the automatic USW operation factors. Another automatic operation factor of the USW is frame synchronization loss (LOF) on the radio frame. The RFCOH is extracted to regenerate the STM-1 signal. The RPS function at the receiver end is performed by the USW. The USW can hitless switch in case of manual operation and most of the automatic operation caused by ordinary fading. MSOH and RSOH drop/insert and AU-Pointer rewriting are carried out. The 8 unipolar signal spreams are converted to an STM-1 CMI signal and sent to the BSW unit of the SCSU. The BSW cannot work in hitless, however, it further isolates the channel to be tested or during system failure. Figure 2.6 shows the main signal flow on STM-1 Electrical Interface equipment. This configuration is used as SE INTF terminal equipment.

2-10

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.6 shows the main signal flow of the STM-1 Electrical Interface equipment without SD (Space Diversity).

TDP Prot CH

USW

DUP BPF

STM-1 CMI RDP

USW

STM-1 Electrical In/out Main 1

MOD TX

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW RDP

USW

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU

Main 2

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BSW RDP

USW

DEM RX

BPF

BPF

MSTU

Main 3

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW RDP

USW

WS R, S UC(F1)

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU BRU

UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N

STM-1 CMI

RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO

STM-1 Unipolar

NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit Figure 2.6 - of Main Signal Flow of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal

LCT

EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON

SCSU

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-11

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.2.3

UMN

Space Diversity As a counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, Space Diversity (SD) reception is provided as standard supply. Enable or disable the SD function is to be set through the LCT. Figure 2.7 shows the diagram of RF/IF section of MSTU applied for SD reception. From SD Antenna To/from Main Antenna

DUP MOD

MIX

IFA LNZ

1st IF LOC

DEM

MIX

DELAY EQL

MIX

IFA LNZ

MIX

MSTU Main 1

MIX

HYB

IF DADE

AMP

RXPL

AMP

MIX

MIX

AMP

MIX

FIL

MIX

MIX

EPS MIX

MIX

MIX

AMP

BPF

RF LOC

BPF

LNA

BPF

AMP

RXPL

AMP

BPF

LNA

TXPLO

2nd IF

DELAY EQL

MIX

EPS

IF DADE

1st IF LOC

DEM

HYB

FIL

TXPLO

2nd IF

MSTU Prot

MOD

MIX

RF LOC

BPF

LNA

MIX

BPF

LNA

BRU MOD : Modulator IFA : IF Amplifier LNZ : Linearizer MIX : Mixer as Freq. Converter FIL : Filter AMP : RF Amplifier EPS : Endless Phase Shifter

LNA : Low Noise Amplifier HYB : Hybrid as IF Combiner IF DADE : Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer (adjustable) DELAY EQL : Delay Equalizer (adjustable) DEM : Demodulator LOC : Local Oscillator TX/RX PLO : Phase Locked Loop Oscillator

Figure 2.7 - Diagram of Space Diversity Reception

2-12

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION The MSTU is equipped with two sets of receiver. One receiver (Main receiver) is connected to the Main antenna (upper) and the other (SD receiver) is connected to the SD antenna (lower). Two receiver outputs are combined together after phase synchronization. Phase synchronization is achieved by controlling the nd 2 IF local carrier to SD receiver through the Endless Phase Shifter (EPS). The combining ratio of two receiver outputs is controlled through algorithms to optimize transmission performance. The SD system can improve the Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) up to 2 to 3 dB during the stable propagation condition period, and remarkably reduce the possibility of outage due to multi-path fading.

2.2.4

MSTU Front Panel Figure 2.8 shows the front panel of MSTU unit. Table 2.1 shows the functions of MSTU front panel Table 2.1 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel

No.

Item

Function

(1)

FAN

4 cooling fans for transmitter.

(2)

FAN PWR

Power cable connector for cooling fans

(3)

POWER ON/OFF

DC power supply switch for MSTU unit

(4)

TX LO MON

Monitor terminal for TX local frequency

(5)

70M IN

70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement

(6)

REF I/O

In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.

(7)

70M OUT MN 70M OUT SD

70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD antenna reception

(8)

DADE

DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference

(9)

D-EQL

Delay equalizer for branching network

(10)

XPIC OUT (master)

XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal

(11)

XPIC IN (slave)

XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation

(12)

INCR DECR ITEM No.

Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only)

LED indicator

Alarm/status indicator :

UNIT/RCI LINE

Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on * : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.

(13)

Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-13

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

FAN (1)

FAN PWR (2) ON

POWER ON/OFF (3)

TX F MON (4)

70M IN

(5)

REF I/O

(6)

MN 70M OUT (7) SD

OFF

DADE

(8)

D-EQL (9)

XPIC OUT (10) XPIC IN

(11)

INCR DECR

Factory use only.

ITEM No.

for normal operation. (12)

ITEM No. must be “ 0 “

UNIT/RCI (13) LINE

Figure 2.8 - Front Panel of MSTU unit

2-14

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.2.4.1

Top View of MSTU Adapter RF output/input connectors from/to MSTU unit are located at the top of each MSTU unit. These connectors are mounted on the MSTU plug-in adapter as an intermediate device. Figure 2.9 shows the top view of MSTU adapter. Figure 2.9 - Top View of MSTU

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-15

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

OW/UC/RUC/WS Signal Transmission In addition to the main signal (STM-1 signal), the SRT 1F system can also transmit several auxiliary signals. Some signals are accessible for user’s utilization through the connectors in the Connection area on the SCSU. Some signals are exclusively used by the SRT 1F to control the SRT 1F system itself. This chapter describes auxiliary signals for user’s utilization as follows: Transmitted by STM-1 SOH (Section Overhead) •

Two Engineering Orderwires per system

•

One User Channel per STM-1

•

One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (see 3.4 Wayside Traffic)

Transmitted by RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead)

2.2.5

•

Two User Channels per system

•

One Wayside Traffic per STM-1

Engineering Orderwire (OW) The SRT 1F provides two engineering orderwires. One is transmitted by E1 byte of RSOH (Regenerator Section OH). The other one is transmitted by E2 byte of MSOH (Multiplex Section OH). Generally, the orderwire from E1 is used as omnibus, and the orderwire from E2 as express. Voice frequency signals of two orderwire from E1 and E2 are independent and have no mutual communication. The orderwires interfacing circuit is the SV unit in the SCSU. The SV unit has two sets of orderwire interface for E1 and E2; 2-wire VF modular socket for telephone set connection and 4-wire VF circuit for the connection to/from other equipment. The SV unit has a common circuit for Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) function and LED/Buzzer for station calling. The RF channel to transmit orderwires is software settable. Orderwires are RPS (USW) protected.

2-16

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

MSTU Prot

Telephone set

2W VF(E2)

To/from Other Equipment

E1

VF(E1) SV unit in SCSU

E1

Software selection

E2

E2

MSTU Main 1

To/from Other Station

E1

MSTU Main 2

E2

VF(E1)

E1

4W VF(E2)

E2

MSTU Main N

Figure 2.10 - Signal Flow of Orderwire

2.2.6

User Channel (UC) A 64 kb/s User Channel (UC) per RF channel is prepared for user’s data communication. This user channel is transmitted through byte F1 of the RSOH. The user channel interfacing circuit is the Bipolar Switch (BSW) units in the SCSU. User Channels are RPS (USW and BSW) protected. MSTU Prot

In/Out port

64 kb/s Main 1 Main 2

BSW units in SCSU

Main 1 Main 2 Main N

Main N

MSTU Main 1

Prot To/from Other Stations Main 1 Main 2 Main N

Figure 2.11 - Signal Flow of User Channel (F1)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-17

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.2.7

UMN

Radio User Channel (RUC) Two Radio User Channels (RUC) per system are provided to transmit voice frequency signals (VF) or 64 kb/s data for user’s utilization. The RUCs are transferred by the Radio Frame Complementary OH. Two RUC channels are transmitted by the Main 1 and Protection channel in parallel for duplication. At the receive side, one of the RUC sets is selected VF or 64 kb/s digital interface is selectable through the sub-modules on the SV unit.

In/out port RUC #1, #2 MSTU Prot

VF/64 kb/s #1

VF/64 kb/s #2

Prot

SV unit in SCSU

To/from Other Station MSTU Main 1

Main 1

RUC #1, #2

Figure 2.12 - Radio User Channel Signal Flow

2-18

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.2.8

Wayside Traffic (WS) The SRT 1F system is provided to transmit two Wayside Traffics (WS, 2.048 Mb/s each) per STM-1 for local traffic transfer. One of two Wayside traffics (WS SOH) is transmitted by the undefined national usage byte of SOH. Another Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH) is transmitted by the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead. The interface circuit of Wayside traffics (WS SOH and WS RFCOH) is the BSW (Bipolar Switch) unit on the SCSU. Input/output port connectors are located on the front panel of the BSW unit (for 75 ohms unbalance), and in the Connection Area of the SCSU (for 120 ohms balance). The input/output port interface features hardware set. Wayside signals are RPS (USW and BSW) protected. MSTU Prot

Prot

MSTU Main 1

Main 1

WS (SOH) BSW Main 1 WS (RFCOH)

To/from Other Station

WS (SOH) BSW Main 2

MSTU Main 2

WS (RFCOH)

Main 2

WS (SOH) BSW Main N

MSTU Main N

Main N

WS (RFCOH)

Figure 2.13 - Wayside Traffic Signal Flow

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-19

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.2.9

UMN

Digital Communication Channel (DCC) Digital Communication Channels (DCCs) are provided for the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) signal transmission. The DCC, is detailed in chapter “2.6.6 Embedded Communication Unit”.

2-20

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.3

OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System The SRT 1F uses three kinds of overhead bit to transfer the signals for system supervise/control and user’s utilization. In addition to the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) of STM-1 frame, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is provided between two MSTUs across a radio section. Figure 2.14 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH. SDH Radio System

Terminal

Back to back terminal

Terminal

Radio Frame

Radio Frame

MS

MS

MS

MS

RFCOH RSOH MSOH

RFCOH RSOH MSOH

RFCOH RSOH MSOH

Figure 2.14

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-21

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.3.1

UMN

MSOH and RSOH The Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) are compatible with SDH optical fiber systems in accordance with ITU-T G. 707. The MSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the multiplex section. The RSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the multiplex/regenerator section. Figure 2.15 shows the STM-1 frame format and overhead bit assignment. Table 2.2 shows the function of MSOH, RSOH, Pointer and Path Overhead (POH). 270 Bytes

9 Bytes

RSOH 9 Rows

Payload

Pointer MSOH

RSOH Pointer MSOH

A1 B1 D1 H1-1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1

A1 WS WS H1-2 B2 WS WS WS Z1

A1 WS WS H1-3 B2 WS WS WS Z1

A2 E1 D2 H2-1 K1 D5 D8 D11 Z2

A2

A2

WS H2-2 WS WS WS WS Z2

H2-3 WS WS WS WS M1

J0 F1 D3 H3-1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2

WS WS H3-2 WS WS WS WS

WS WS WS H3-3 WS WS WS WS WS

MSOH, RSOH and Pointer WS

J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4 Z5

POH

: Wayside traffic transmission by Radio specific usage byte and National usage byte : Reserved for future international standardization

Figure 2.15 - STM-1 Frame Format Construction

2-22

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Table 2.2 - Main Function of Section Overhead (ITU-T G.707) Overhead

SOH

Pointer

Byte Abbr.

Usage

A1, A2

Framing

D1 to D12

Data Communication Channels

J0 E1, E2

Regenerator Section Trace Orderwire

F1

User channel

B1

BIP-8

B2

BIP-24

K1, K2

APS channel

S1

Synchronous status

M1

Far end block error

Z1, Z2 H1 to H3

Spare Pointer bit

Function

6 bytes are used for STM-1 frame synchronization. The pattern is A1A1A1A2A2A2 to each STM-1 frame, A1 = 11110110, A2 = 00101000 12 bytes are used for Telecommunication Management Network (TMN). D1 to D3 are communication for Regenerator Section. D4 to D12 are communication for Multiplex Section. One byte is unique number assigned to an STM-1 signal for identification in aggregated STM-N level. Two bytes are used for voice frequency transmission as engineering orderwire. E1 are communication for Regenerator Section. E2 are communication for Multiplex Section. One byte is reserved for user purposes. A User Channel (SOH) is to be transmitted. Bit Interleaved Parity 8 One byte is used to monitor the error performance of the Regenerator Section. Bit Interleaved Parity 24 Three bytes are used to monitor the error performance of the Multiplex Section. Two bytes are allocated for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) switching control. One byte is used for quality control of the synchronous clock signal. One byte is allocated to transmit the block error information to the far end. Four bytes are reserved as spare. Administration Unit (AU) pointer bits are used for Section Adaptation (SA). SS bit Sending side H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable Y1 (H1#2) : same as H1 Y2 (H1#3) : same as H1 Receiving side H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable Y1 (H1#2) : XX (no use) Y2 (H1#3) : XX (no use) Note: H1 is set to the same value for both the sending and receiving sides.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-23

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.3.2

UMN

RFCOH The SRT 1F organizes the Radio Frame for the transmission between two Main Signal Transmit Units (MSTU) across a radio section. The Radio Frame is composed of the STM-1 signal and Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH). The Radio Frame has two types of configuration based on the modulation system, 64 QAM and 128 QAM. •

64 QAM : 6 streams at 28.512 Mb/s

•

128 QAM : 7 streams at 24.192 Mb/s

The Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) transfer two classes of signals and a number of dummy bits. One is exclusively for internal use to monitor/control the SRT 1F system, and the other is for user’s utilization. Signals for SRT 1F system internal use: •

FA : Frame Alignment bit to maintain the frame synchronization of radio frame (36 bits = 288 kb/s for 64 QAM, 42 bits = 336 kb/s for 128 QAM ).

•

C1 : Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) level 1 (1184 bits = 9472 kb/s for 64 QAM, 1004 bits = 8032 kb/s for 128 QAM).

•

C2 : Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) level 2. Radio parity for the error performance across radio section before error correction is checked through this signal (296 bits = 2368 kb/s for 64 QAM, 251 bits = 2008 kb/s for 128 QAM).

•

BSCS (RSC*): Baseband Switch Control Signal to control the Radio Protection System (RPS) (32 bits = 256 kb/s).

•

RID1 to RID4 : Route identifier for radio section (4 bits = 32 kb/s).

•

ATPC : Automatic Transmit Power Control signal (6 bits = 56 kb/s)

•

1BE/X1BE : Transfer bit for 1 Bit Error (2 bits = 16 kb/s).

•

FMS/XFMS : (2 bits = 16 kb/s).

•

OOS/XOOS : Transfer bit for Out of Service (OOS) (2 bits = 16 kb/s).

Transfer

bit

for

Frequency

Measurement

Signals for user’s utilization •

WSRF : Wayside traffic by RFCOH (264 bits = 2112 kb/s)

•

RUC (RSC*) : Radio User Channel (16 bits = 128 kb/s)

Note: RSC* (Radio Service Channel, 108 bits = 864 kb/s ) is composed of BSCS, RUC, unused bits and stuff bits for redundant transmission by the Main 1 and Protection channel only. Figure 2.16 shows the Radio Frame structure.

2-24

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Total 171.072 Mb/s 15.552 Mb/s

STM-1 155.520 Mb/s

S O H

RFCOH

RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead) and STM-1 frame are mapped to compose the Radio Frame as below.

Payload

3564 bits (28.512 Mb/s) per 6 bits

148 words 1776 bits

6 bits

st

S6 S5 S4 S3

nd

1 Sub-frame

S6 to S1

Frame Alignment Bits

S2 S1

àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà à à à à à à à à X2à à C2 à à C1à à C1à à C1à à C1

2 Sub-frame

à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …X2à à C2 à …C1à à C1

1st word (12 bits) 6 bits

148 words 1776 bits

1st to 82nd word (984 bits)

àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà à à à à à X1à à X2à à C2 à à C1à à C1à à C1à à C1

à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …X1à à X2à à C2 à …C1à à C1à à C1

83rd word (12 bits) 83rd to 148th word (792 bits)

Note: à : STM-1 signal (Payload, RSOH, MSOH and Pointer) C1 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 1 C2 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 2 X1 :

RSC (BSCS, RUC and dummy bits), FMS/XFMS, OOS/XOOS and RID1 to RID4 rd th Transmitted by 83 to 148 word of each sub-frame.

X2 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH), 1BE/X1BE and ATP st th Transmitted by 1 to 148 word of each sub-frame Figure 2.16 - Radio Frame Structure of 64 QAM modulation

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-25

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

Total 169.344 Mb/s 13.824 Mb/s

STM-1 155.520 Mb/s

S O H

RFCOH

RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead) and STM-1 frame are mapped to compose the Radio Frame as below.

Payload

3024 bits (24.192 Mb/s) per 6 bits

6 bits

126 words 1512 bits

st

S7 to S1

125 words 1500 bits

nd

1 Sub-frame

2 Sub-frame

1st Sub-frame S7 S6 S5 S4

Frame Alignment bits

S3 S2 S1

àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà à à à à à à à à X2à à C2 à à C1à à C1à à C1à à C1

à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …X2à à C2 à …C1à à C1

1st word (12 bits) 6 bits

àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà à à à à à X1à à X2à à C2 à à C1à à C1à à C1à à C1

à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …X1à à X2à à C2 à …C1à à C1à à C1

37th word (12 bits)

1st to 36th word (432 bits)

37th to 126th word (1080

2nd Sub-frame S7 S6 S5 S4

Frame Alignment bits

S3 S2 S1

àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà à à à à à à à à X2à à C2 à à C1à à C1à à C1à à C1

à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …à à à à à …X2à à C2 à …C1à à C1

1st word (12 bits) 6 bits

1st to 35th word (420 bits)

àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà àààààààààààà à à à à à X1à à X2à à C2 à à C1à à C1à à C1à à C1

à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …à à à à à à à à …X1à à X2à à C2 à …C1à à C1à à C1

36th word (12 bits) 36th to 125th word (1080

Figure 2.17 - Radio Frame Structure of 128 QAM modulation

2-26

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Note: à : STM-1 signal (Payload, MSOH, RSOH and Pointer) C1 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 1 C2 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 2 X1 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH), RSC (BSCS, RUC and dummy bits), FMS/XFMS, OOS/XOOS, RID1 to RID4,1BE/X1BE and ATPC th th st Transmitted by 37 to 126 word of the 1 sub-frame th th nd and 36 to 125 word of the 2 sub-frame.

X2 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH). Transmitted by all words of each sub-frame.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-27

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.4

UMN

Radio Protection Switch System The SRT 1F is equipped with the Radio Protection Switch system (RPS) to improve signal transmission reliability. Automatic protection switch intervenes in case of equipment failure and degradation of the propagation condition. Manual switching is implemented for testing and maintenance operation purposes.

2.4.1

Outline of Radio Protection Switching Protection Ratio One protection channel is provided for each switching group. •

Alternated operation : One group (RPS 1 = Group 1) having 7 + 1 protection

•

Co-channel operation : Two groups (RPS 1 = Group 1 and RPS 2 = Group 2) having 7 + 1 protection each.

Maximum number of main channels is limited by the frequency band being utilized (maximum 7 main channels per group). Switching Device The Radio Protection System has two switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and unipolar switch (USW) stages. Figure 2.18 shows the outline of the Radio Protection System.

Prot

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

BSW

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

BSW

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

BSW

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

Main 1 BB INTF

Main 2 BB INTF

Main 3 BB INTF

To/from Main N Unipolar signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal

Prot Main 1 BSW

BB INTF

Main 2 BSW

BB INTF

Main 3 BSW

BB INTF

To/from Main N Unipolar signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal

: Bipolar signal (CMI) line : Unipolar signal (19.44 Mb/s X 8) line BB INTF

: Optional BB INTF unit (OPT INTF)

Figure 2.18 - Radio Protection System

2-28

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Switching Section

The switching section of the Radio Protection System consists of two facing SRT 1F equipment. Figure 2.19 shows the RPS switching section.

Terminal A

Back to back Terminal B

USW MSTU

MSTU USW

Terminal C

USW MSTU

MSTU USW

BB INTF

BSW

USW MSTU

MSTU USW

BSW

BSW

USW MSTU

MSTU USW

BSW

BB INTF

BB INTF

BSW

USW MSTU

MSTU USW

BSW

BSW

USW MSTU

MSTU USW

BSW

BB INTF

Unipolar CMI To/from Main N

Unipolar

Unipolar

Switching section A to B

Unipolar CMI To/from Main N

CMI CMI To/from Main N

Switching section B to C

Figure 2.19 - Switching Section OW/UC/WS Signal The Radio Protection Switching of Orderwire, User Channel by SOH and Wayside traffic by SOH/RFCOH depends on the operation of STM-1 main signal. Co-channel Operation In case of Co-channel operation, two independent Radio Protection Switching groups (RPS 1 and RPS 2) are configured according to the system requirement. RPS 1 and RPS 2 operate independently, and there is no mutual protection switching between two groups. Human Machine Interface (HMI) The switching status and manual switch operation are supervised through the local terminal, LCT. There is no display/control panel equipped on the SRT 1F. The LCT can supervise/control all SRT 1F equipment (NE = Network Element) within a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) group connecting the local terminal.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-29

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.4.2

UMN

USW and BSW The Radio Protection System has two switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and unipolar switch (USW) stages. USW (Unipolar Switch) The USW is a part of the digital transmit/receive processor of MSTU. This switch can hitless switch between protection and any of the main channels through automatic baseband DADEing. Protection switching on fade is carried out by this USW. Fading and equipment failure on the MSTU RF/IF stage are detected as BER ALM or F LOSS at the receiving end to initiate automatic RPS operation.

•

Signal level

:

8 streams of 19.44 Mb/s, Unipolar

•

Direction

:

Uni-directional Auto revertive

•

Initiator

Loss of frame alignment (F LOSS)

:

Signal degrade (BER ALM) 1 bit error detected (1BE, option setting)

BSW (Bipolar Switch) One BSW unit per main channel is mounted in the SCSU (Supervisory Control & Switching Unit). This switch cannot hitless switch because of the signal level (bipolar) and of the switching device (high-speed mechanical relay). BSW automatic protection switching is mainly determined by equipment failure. Manual protection switching is also a non hitless switching but can safely isolate a specific main channel from traffic transmission, for testing and troubleshooting purposes. •

Signal level

:

STM-1, CMI (Coded Mark Inversion)

•

Direction

:

Bi-directional Auto revertive

•

Initiator

:

MSTU equipment alarm MSTU line failure alarm MSTU power supply failure

Figure 2.20 and Figure 2.21 shows the function of USW and BSW.

2-30

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Terminal A

BB INTF

BB INTF

BSW

BSW

Back to back Terminal B

USW

TX

RX

USW

USW

TX

RX USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

BSW

BSW

BSW

BSW

Terminal C

USW

TX

RX USW

USW

TX

RX USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

BSW

BB INTF

BSW

BB INTF

Propagation failure

Following propagation failure of Main 1 from Terminal B to Terminal A, USWs (shaded) of one direction from B to A of Main 1 operate as shown above. Other switches are not affected at all.

Figure 2.20 - Automatic Operation of USW

Terminal A

BB INTF

BB INTF

BSW

BSW

Back to back Terminal B

USW

TX

RX

USW

USW

TX

RX USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

BSW

BSW

BSW

BSW

Terminal C

USW

TX

RX USW

USW

TX

RX USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

USW

RX

TX

USW

BSW

BB INTF

BSW

BB INTF

Equipment Failure

Following equipment failure of Main 1 Terminal A (MSTU receiver), BSWs (shaded) of both directions B and A of Main 1 operate as shown above.

Figure 2.21 - Automatic Operation of BSW

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-31

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.4.3

UMN

Switching Priority The following is the priority order of Radio Protection Switching;Table 2.3 - Priority Order of RPS Operation

Priority

Switching

Description

st

LOCKOUT

Inhibits any type of RPS operation

nd

FORCED

Switch over to Prot CH unless the specified Main CH or Prot CH is locked out. (* Not effective in case of Prot CH error)

rd

AUTOMATIC

The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is free and normal.

1 2 3

The priority order of automatic switching is listed below. th

MANUAL

The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH by the command through LCT, if Prot CH is free and normal.

th

OCC

Occasional traffic transmission (option)

4 5

The lowest priority traffic is allowed to be transferred by Prot CH when Prot CH is free and normal.

Table 2.4 - Priority Order of Automatic Protection Switching Priority

Highest

Switching operation

BSW operation of Priority CH (default = Main 1) BSW operation of the first incoming channel BSW operation of the second incoming channel USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of Priority CH (default = Main 1) USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the first incoming channel USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the second incoming channel USW operation by BER ALM of Priority CH (default = Main 1) USW operation by BER ALM of the first incoming channel

Lowest

2-32

USW operation by BER ALM of the second incoming channel

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.4.4

Switching Initiator and Operation Time Automatic protection of RPS is initiated by;•

Signal Failure : Frame alignment loss (F LOSS) of the Radio Frame

•

Signal Degrade: Bit Error Ratio Alarm (BER ALM) or 1 bit error detection of radio parity before forward error correction.

Signal Failure (F LOSS alarm) F LOSS alarm is initiated within 3 m seconds after frame synchronization loss and recovered within 3 m seconds after establishing synchronization. Signal Degrade The threshold level of BER ALM can be set through the LCT. Table 2.5 shows the setting position and time to initiate/recover of BER ALM. Default setting is “ 2 “. Table 2.5 - BER ALM Initiation Setting and Time to Initiate/Restore

Setting

BER ALM Initiation before Error correction

BER after Error correction

1

1 bit error

0

2

1 X 10

–3

3

5 X 10

–4

4 5

Time to Initiate (maximum)

----

5 ms

6 X 10

-5

4 ms

3 X 10

-5

8 ms

2.5 ms

6 X 10

-6

40 ms

5.0 ms

3 X 10

-6

80 ms

25.0 ms

6 X 10

-7

400 ms

50.0 ms

3 X 10

-7

800 ms

6 X 10

-8

4000 ms

5 X 10

0.25 ms

6 X 10

-8

0.5 ms

1 X 10

–4

3 X 10

-10

5 X 10

–5

4 X 10

-11

6

1 X 10

–5

1 X 10

-12

less

7

5 X 10

–6

1 X 10

-12

less

1 X 10

–6

1 X 10

-12

less

Time to Restore (average)

no error

-7

8

ALM Restoration before Error correction

250.0 ms

Switching Time Without occasional traffic: Less than 5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time and control signal propagation time. With occasional traffic: Less than 9.5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time and control signal propagation time. DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) Automatic DADE (± 3 bits) functions to automatically synchronizes two baseband signals transmitted by a Main CH and Prot CH when having to carry out protection switching. Manual DADE (0 to 31 bits): compensates the baseband signal path difference between each Main CH and Prot CH.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-33

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

Wait to Restore (WTR, option setting) Delay time from the detection of BER ALM restoration up to releasing protection switching is available to eliminate unnecessary RPS operation when the propagation condition is unstable. If other channels fail during the WTR period, the WTR will be canceled immediately and Prot CH is taken over by the newly failed channel.

2.4.5

Occasional Traffic (option) The lowest priority traffic can be transmitted by Prot CH when all channels are normal. If a channel fails, the occasional traffic will be immediately disconnected to remove traffic from the main failed channel. Extra OCC INTF and OPT INTF unit are required for occasional traffic transmission.

2-34

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.5

Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) The SRT 1F equipment is equipped with a Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) for each switching group. The main function of SCSU is: •

Interfacing the STM-1, Orderwire, User Channel, Wayside and Digital Communication Channel.

•

Interfacing the Local Terminal and Network Management System.

•

Interfacing the External Timing Clock Source.

•

Perform Radio Protection Switching (RPS) at bipolar (CMI) level.

•

Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and indication.

•

Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data.

•

Control the Radio Protection Switching unipolar signal level.

•

Control the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP for STM-1 MS optical interface only).

•

Provide Orderwire functions.

•

Administrate the Timing Clock Synchronization.

•

Relay Housekeeping (External) supervisory/control signal.

•

Register the NE setting (provisioning) data.

System at bipolar and

The SCSU is composed of following units: BSW

: Bipolar Switch unit for each main channel

SV

: Supervisory unit

TCU HK

(1)

: Timing Control Unit

(2)

ECU

: Housekeeping unit

(3)

: Embedded Communication Unit

OCC INTF

(4)

: Occasional Traffic Interface unit

BSW INTF

(5)

: Baseband Switch Interface unit

Note:

(1)

: Card protection (X and Y) is available as option.

(2) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed. (3) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed. (4) : Option, one unit will be installed for occasional traffic use. (5) : Option, one unit will be installed for RPS 2 (Group 2) control

Figure 2.22 shows the functional block diagram of SCSU.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-35

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

BSW units Main 1 to n

M1

M2

MSTU units

Mn Prot

M1

M2

Mn

STM-1 CMI ♣ WS X 2 UC X 1 To/from Prot & M1 To/from all MSTUs

EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK OUT

TCU

HK ALARM IN HK CONTROL OUT

HK*

DCC IN DCC OUT

To/from all MSTUs

SCSU

SV unit ECU*

LCT

SV sub-unit

LAN/X25

for RPS 2

HK IN/OUT

To/from RPS 2

DCC IN/OUT VF/DGTL

Radio UC X 2 OW (2W VF) X 2

OW

E1,E2

OW (4W VF) X 2

* Note: HK and ECU are option BBIU

BBC

Main 1 to n OPT in/out

To/from STM-1 CMI In/out of BSW ♣ BB

MSP SW

Figure 2.22 - Diagram of SCSU Function

2-36

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.5.1

Signal Interface STM-1 Electrical Interface and Wayside traffic 75 ohms unbalanced connectors are located on the front panel of the BSW unit. 120 ohms balanced connectors for Wayside traffic and other signals are located in the Connection Area of SCSU. Interface connector pin assignment is shown in par. “3. Installation” of this manual.

2.5.2

Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit A Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel. The STM-1 Electrical (CMI) signals to/from other equipment are interfaced through this BSW unit. In case of Optical interface, the signals converted to STM-1 CMI signal by the BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit, optional) interface this BSW unit. The BSW unit simultaneously switches the following signals: •

An STM-1 CMI signal

•

Wayside Traffics (SOH and RFCOH), a User Channel (SOH)

The bipolar switch operation is not hitless and produces some data loss, however, it safely isolates the channel.

2.5.3

Supervisory (SV) unit An SV unit is provided for each SRT 1F equipment to supervise/control the Radio Protection system. To control two RPS groups (RPS 1= group 1 and RPS 2 = group 2), the SV unit must be equipped with a sub-unit for RPS 2 control. The main function of SV unit is: •

Terminate Orderwires, User Channels and DCCs.

•

Interface the Local Terminal, Network Management System (X.25) and ethernet.

•

Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and indication.

•

Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data.

•

Control the RPS at bipolar and unipolar signal level.

•

Control the MSP (for STM-1 MS optical interface only).

•

Provide Orderwire functions.

•

Register the NE setting (provisioning) data.

•

Relay Housekeeping (8 item input and 4 item output)

Figure 2.23 shows LEDs switches and connectors of SV unit.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-37

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

SV UNIT/RCI LINE MISC ACS/SWDL BACK UP

NORM CR/MJ/RCI MN/WR MAINT CARD OUT ACO LAN

CALL E1 2W E1

X25/BTB

CALL E2 ACO SW

2W E2 LED TEST

LED Indicator D-sub 9 (f)

Push SW

Dip switch

Modular Jack

Figure 2.23 - Front View of SV unit

2-38

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Table 2.6a - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (1/3) LED Indication Group

LED

Color

Status

Description

Indication for SV unit

UNIT/RCI

Red

Steady on

Unit failure of SV unit Log memory threshold crossed

Blinking

RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit

Green (Y)

Steady on

Normal operation of SV unit

Yellow (G)

Blinking

Configuration mismatch of SV unit

Red

Steady on

SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure

Green (Y)

Steady on

SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal

MISC

Red

Steady on

Housekeeping alarm (DI) on

ACS/SWDL

Green (Y)

Steady on

NE is logged on by user

Red

Steady on

Mismatch of software version

Yellow (G)

Blinking

Software download is on progress

BACK UP

Yellow (G)

Steady on

Back up of setting data is on progress

NORM

Green (Y)

Steady on

Normal operation of NE

CR/MJ/RCI

Red

Steady on

CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE

Blinking

RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in NE

LINE

Indication for NE

Orderwire

Note :

MN/WR

Red

Steady on

MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE

MAINT

Yellow (G)

Steady on

Maintenance condition of NE

CARD OUT

Red

Steady on

CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than WR

Yellow (G)

Steady on

CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious than WR

ACO

Yellow (G)

Steady on

Alarm cut off of NE

CALL E1

Green (Y)

Blinking

E1 orderwire is being called

CALL E2

Green (Y)

Blinking

E2 orderwire is being called

Green (Y)

= Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.

Yellow (G)

= Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-39

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

Table 2.6b - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (2/3) Switch Control Switch

Part No.

Type

Description

ACO SW

SW A2

Push

Alarm cut off

LED TEST

SW A3

Push

LED test

SV CPU TEST

SW B2

Push

Factory use

UL RESET

SW A1

Push

Factory use

------

SW A1

Dip

Factory use

Tablr 2.6c - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (3/3) Connector Function Connector

Part No.

Type

Description

E1-2W

CN 17

Modular

E1 orderwire 2-wire telephone

E2-2W

CN 18

Modular

E2 orderwire 2-wire telephone

CN 71

Multi-pin

LCT (Local Terminal) connector

LAN

CN 91

Modular

LAN connector

------

CN 41

Multi-pin

Factory use

------

CN 21

Multi-pin

Factory use

------

CN 51

Multi-pin

Factory use

LED Indication The SV unit displays indicate a summary of the alarms/status conditions on the SRT 1F equipment (NE) as shown on the

2-40

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Table 2.6. Detailed LED indications are available on each unit. Orderwire Function Two fully independent orderwires, E1 and E2 are provided. To use an orderwire, connect an ordinary 2-wire telephone set to E1-2W or E2-2W modular jack. The station is selectively called through the telephone key-pad. Individual station call: Station group call:

Press #, Group No., Station No. Press #, Group No., * * ( 2 asterisks)

4-wire VF in/out ports are provided for the connection to/from other equipment. Housekeeping (HK) 8 items of HK alarm input and 4 items of HK control output are available as standard supply. Digital Communication Channel (DCC) A DCC line can be transmitted by the Main 1 channel and Protection channel.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-41

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.5.4

UMN

Timing Control Unit (TCU) A Timing Control Unit (TCU) is provided for each SRT 1F equipment. The Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) provides an extra slot and automatic/manual switching facilities for TCU unit protection (X and Y) as option. The TCU accepts the synchronization timing clock signal from three (3) STM-1 lines and/or two (2) external clock inputs (2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mb/s), then regenerates the clock signal to supply to the NE and external clock output port. The TCU generates the clock signal internally (Holdover mode and Internal mode) in case of signal source input loss. For detailed application, see “2.8.2 Synchronization”.

2.5.5

Housekeeping (HK) unit The SV unit can accommodate 8 items of Housekeeping (HK) input and 4 items of HK output. To increase Housekeeping (HK) in/out items, a maximum of two HK units can be installed as option. Number of item

HK input (DI)

HK output (DO)

SV unit only

8

4

SV unit + HK 1

40

20

SV unit + HK 1 + HK 2

72

36

SRT 1F equipment

Housekeeping input (DI)

6.4 k

Photo coupler

Other equipment

L

-48 V (-38.4 to –57.6 V)

0.3 mA to 11.3 mA

Housekeeping output (DO) L

Max. I = 100 mA Max. V = DC 110 V

Relay L

Figure 2.24 - Housekeeping in/out (DI/DO) Interface

2-42

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.5.6

Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (option) The SV unit terminates a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) by using Main 1 channel and protection channel redundancy. To increase the number of DCC lines, a maximum of two ECU units can be installed as option, the ECU 1 for RPS group 1 and the ECU 2 for group 2. An ECU terminates maximum 8 DCC lines. RSDCC (Radio)

SV unit

RSDCC (Line)

MSTU (RPS 1 - M1)

Prot

MSDCC (Line)

RSDCC (Line) Max. 6

ECU 1 unit

RSDCC (Radio)

M2

MSTU (RPS 1 - M2)

M4

M5

M6

M7

GP1 - M n (“n” is selectable)

M1

RSDCC (Line) Max. 7

ECU 2 unit

M3

MSTU (RPS 2 - M1)

M2

M3

M4

M5

M6

M7

Figure 2.25 - Configuration of DCC Lines with ECU

2.5.7

Occasional Interface (OCC INTF) unit (option) An OCC INTF unit will be installed for optional occasional traffic transmission through the protection channel. The OCC INTF provides STM-1 CMI interface and to be installed under the BSW unit of the last main channel.

2.5.8

Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option) A BSW INTF unit will be installed on the 2nd SCSU to control the BSW units of the RPS 2 group. The BSW INTF relays control command and response signals between st nd the SV unit on the 1 SCSU, and the BSW units on the 2 SCSU.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-43

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.6

UMN

Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU) The STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) is the standard baseband interface of the SRT 1F equipment. The equipment is composed of a BRU (Branching Network Unit), MSTUs (Main Signal Transmission Unit) and a SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). The BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit) is optionally available for other type of interface, OPT INTF MS/RS (Optical Interface for Multiplex Section and Regenerator Section). The main function of the BBIU is to: •

Provide STM-1 Optical baseband interfacing.

•

Perform the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) for OPT INTF (MS).

The BBIU is composed of following units:

*

OPT INTF 1 **

: Optical Interface 1 for 0 to 15 Km

OPT INTF 2 **

: Optical Interface 2 for 15 to 40 Km

MSPSW

: Multiplex Section Protection Switch for OPT INTF

BBC

: BBIU Controller

[Note] *

: An applicable baseband unit should be selected for each channel. Any combination of different types of interface cannot be configured.

**

2.6.1

: Type of OPT INTF must be selected according to fiber optic length. See Table 2.7.

Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit The main function of OPT INTF is to: •

Convert the STM-1 signal from optical to electrical (CMI) and electrical to optical.

•

Drop/insert Orderwires, a User Channel and Digital Communication Channels (*).

•

Drop/insert Section Overhead (SOH); B1,B2, J0, K1, K2, S1 and SSMB (*).

•

AU-4 pointer processing for radio section(*).

•

Check Frame alignment of the STM-1 signal (*).

•

Descramble/scramble the STM-1 signal (*).

•

Recover/retime clock synchronization (*).

•

Provide baseband loop back on the line and radio sides (*).

Note: * marked functions of MSTU are canceled if the BBIU is installed.

2-44

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Three types of OPT INTF are provided according to fiber optic length. Table 2.7 shows the characteristics of each OPT INTF unit. Table 2.7 - Characteristics of OPT INTF Unit

OPT INTF 1

OPT INTF 2

S-1.1

L-1.1

0 - 15 Km

15 - 40 Km

1260 - 1360

1280 – 1335

MLM

MLM

7.7

4.0

- Maximum -20 dB width (nm)

-

-

- Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB)

-

-

- Maximum (dBm)

-8

0

- Minimum (dBm)

-15

-5

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

8.2

10

0 -12

10 – 28

Maximum dispersion (ps/nm)

96

185

Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including connectors (dB)

NA

NA

Maximum discrete reflectance between S & R (dB)

NA

NA

Minimum sensitivity (dBm)

-28

-34

Minimum overload (dBm)

-8

-10

Maximum optical path penalty including chirp and dispersion (dB)

1

1

NA

NA

Application code (ITU-T G.957) Typical hop Operation wavelength range (nm) Transmitter at reference point S Source type Special characteristics - Maximum RMS width (nm)

Mean launched power

Optical path between S and R Attenuation range (dB)

Receiving at reference point R

Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R (dB) Connector Bit rate ITU-T Recommendation Reference

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SC type or FC type STM-1 : 155.520 Mb/s 20 ppm ITU-T G.957 Table 2 and G.703

2-45

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

The baseband signal converted to STM-1 CMI is applied to the Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit of SCSU via the MSPSW unit. Figure 2.27 shows the diagram of the Optical Interface terminal without MSP. Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) To increase the reliability of the fiber optic line, the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) on the line side is provided as option. Figure 2.26 shows the functional diagram of MSP. SDH Optical Terminal DSTR

INTF

SRT 1F Radio Terminal (OPT INTF MSP) STM-1 Optical line

OPT INTF (X)

INTF

BSW

SEL

Line X

SEL

MSPSW

MSTU STM-1 CMI input

OPT INTF (Y) Line Y

DSTR

STM-1 CMI output

Figure 2.26 - Function of Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) Features of MSP operation are as follows: Protection ratio

:

1+1

Signal level

:

STM-1 Electrical unipolar by IC gate

Operation mode

:

Bi-directional/uni-directional (selectable) Non revertive

Initiator

:

Signal Fail (SF) - Loss of STM-1 frame synchronization - Loss of optical signal input - Multiplex section AIS Signal Degrade (SD) -3 -5 -9 - BER : 10 (SF or SD), 10 to 10

- PM : STEP (SD or SF) FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP K1 control signal from the far end station

2-46

Switching time

:

Less than 50 ms plus alarm detection time

Priority order

:

Lockout > Forced > Auto (SF) > Auto (SD) > Manual

Lock-in parameter

:

Switching count, Monitor time, Hold time

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Note: BER

: Bit Error Ratio

PM

: Performance Monitor

- STEP

: Short Term Performance Continuing period of Loss of frame or Severely errored second

- FESP

: 15 minutes Errored Second Performance

- TESP

: 24 hours Errored Second Performance

- FSEP

: 15 minutes Performance

- TSEP

: 24 hours Severely Errored Second Performance

Severely

Errored

Second

Switching count

: The number of MSP operation to start Lock-in during the “Monitor time”.

Monitor time

: The period to monitor “Switching count” to start Lock-in.

Hold time

: The duration from start to end of Lock-in condition.

Figure 2.28 shows the diagram of Optical Interface terminal with MSP.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-47

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.6.2

UMN

MSP SW and BBC MSP SW A Multiplex Section Protection Switch (MSPSW) unit is to be provided for each main channel. The MSPSW unit is a protection switching device for the OPT INTF (with MSP) terminal. The MSPSW unit functions as interface of the STM-1 electrical (CMI) signal between a BB INTF (OPT INTF with/without MSP) and a Bipolar Switch (BSW) of SCSU. BBC One BBIU Controller (BBC) unit is equipped on each BBIU. The BBC controls the MSPSW units following the control command from the Supervisory (SV) unit of the SCSU.

2-48

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.27 shows the schematic diagram of the STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP and SD.

TDP Prot CH

USW

MOD TX

DUP BPF

STM-1 CMI RDP

STM-1 Optical In/out

USW

DEM RX

BPF

MSTU

Main 1 OPT INTF

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW

MSP SW

RDP

USW

DEM RX

BPF

WS R,S UC(F1)

MSTU

Main 2 OPT INTF

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BSW

MSP SW

RDP

USW

DEM RX

WS R,S UC(F1)

BPF

BPF

MSTU

Main 3 OPT INTF

STM-1 CMI

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW

MSP SW

RDP

USW

DEM RX

BPF

WS R,S UC(F1)

MSTU BRU

BBC UC(F1)

BBIU

WS R,S STM-1 CMI

RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO

STM-1 Unipolar

NOTE :

BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit

LCT

Figure 2.27 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP

EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON

SCSU

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-49

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

Figure 2.28 shows the schematic diagram of the STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP and without SD.

TDP Prot CH

USW

RDP

USW

OPT INTF

MSP SW

STM-1

TDP

RDP

OPT INTF

USW

OPT INTF

MSP SW

STM-1

USW

BPF

DEM RX

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BSW RDP

OPT INTF

BPF

USW

DEM RX

WS R,S

BPF

BPF

MSTU OPT INTF

Main 3 Y

MOD TX

WS R,S

UC(F1) X

BPF

MSTU

Main 2 Y

DEM RX

BSW

UC(F1) X

BPF

MSTU

Main 1 Y

DUP

STM-1 CMI

STM-1 Optical In/out X

MOD TX

MSP SW

OPT INTF

STM-1

TDP

USW

MOD TX

BPF

BSW RDP

USW

DEM RX

BPF

WS R,S

MSTU

UC(F1)

BRU

BBC UC(F1)

BBIU

WS R,S STM-1 CMI

RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO

STM-1 Unipolar

NOTE :

BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit

LCT

Figure 2.28 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP

EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON

SCSU

2-50

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.7 2.7.1

Applications Co-Channel Operation The Co-channel frequency operation system can simultaneously transmit two STM-1 signals over the same RF frequency carrier using dual polarization, horizontal and vertical. While the alternated operation can transmit only one STM-1 signal per RF frequency. This system can double the spectrum efficiency. The transmission capacity of Way side, User channel and other auxiliary signals will be also doubled. For the Co-channel operation, the SRT 1F equipment needs the following options: •

An XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceler) module to be installed on the MSTU (Main Signal Transmit Unit).

•

Rx local oscillators running in synchronism.

Cross Polarization Interference Canceler (XPIC) The XPIC is provided to improve the interference distortion caused by cross polarization interference between V-polarization and Hpolarization. For the Co-channel operation, a high Cross Polarization Discrimination (XPD) antenna is used. However, cross polarization interference cannot be compensated only by a high XPD antenna. In addition to a high XPD antenna, a Cross Polarization Interference Canceler is provided. The XPIC is an adaptive cancellation circuit. Two receivers with the same radio frequency receive the combination desired of signal and interference signal components (a part of orthogonal polarization signal). Each of the two Receivers extract their relevant interference signal. The received interference component is removed from the received signal after adaptive amplitude/phase adjustment. Cross cable connections from each XPIC OUT to XPIC IN are required. Figure 2.29 shows the functional diagram of XPIC. Figure 2.30 shows the cross cable connection of MSTUs. Receive Local Carrier Oscillator Two receivers with the same frequency shall be supplied with local synchronized carrier signals. A cable connection to/from the REF I/O of two MSTUs is required. The baseband clock signals are reciprocally synchronized through software setting. Route ID Different route Ids for radio section shall be set for proper signal identification between V-polarization and H-polarization. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-51

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

UMN

Master/Slave setting Master/Slave setting on the MSTU is carried out through the LCT.

Transmitter X

Desired signal LOC

REF I/O

Interference

Receiver X XPIC OUT 70 MHz RF LOC

LOC

IF LOC

XPIC XPIC IN

XPIC REF I/O

Transmitter Y

Desired signal LOC

XPIC OUT 70 MHz

IF LOC

Receiver Y

LOC

Figure 2.29 - Functional Diagram of XPIC

REF I/O (RF LOC)

XPIC IN (70 MHz) XPIC OUT (70 MHz)

Figure 2.30 - Cross Cable Connection of MSTUs for Co-channel Operation

2-52

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.7.2

Synchronization The SRT 1F system shall be synchronized to the reference clock source of the network. The SRT 1F equipment clock signal is supplied through the TCU (Timing Clock Unit) of the SCSU (Supervise, Control and Switching Unit).

2.7.2.1

Synchronization Source The SRT 1F can accept one of three kinds of signals as its synchronization clock source. Incoming STM-1 Signal (LINE) to TCU, maximum 3 inputs •

From STM-1 line input (Line side)

•

From MSTU receiver output (Radio side)

External Clock Input (EXT) to TCU, maximum 2 inputs •

2.048 MHz or

•

2.048 Mb/s

Input connectors are located in the Connection Area of the SCSU. TCU Oscillator •

Holdover mode: In case of synchronization reference source loss, the TCU generates the clock signal in accordance with the data present just before the interruption.

•

After Holdover mode: Free-running self oscillation.

•

Internal Oscillator: If TCU fails, MSTU generates the internal freerunning clock signal.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-53

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 2.7.2.2

UMN

Synchronization Mode The SRT 1F has two Synchronization Mode options. Mode 1 The SRT 1F does not directly output to the Synchronous Source Unit (SSU). The SRT 1F receives the reference clock source from other equipment through the STM-1 signal input (LINE) or EXT CLK input connectors (EXT). The SRT 1F is generally operated in this mode. Mode 2 The SRT 1F directly outputs to the Synchronous Source Unit (SSU). For Equipment Clock (EC) source, the external clock from the SSU is basically the first choice. Figure 2.31 shows Synchronization modes. SSU: Synchronous Source Unit High quality reference clock source equipment to generate/regenerate the primary/secondary clock signal of the network in accordance with ITU-U Rec. G.813.

2-54

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Ext 2M CLK (X) (Y) Line CLK PRI 1 PRI 2 PRI 3

EC Selection (Max. 3) to be selected according to Quality (SSMB) & Priority

T0

INT CLK

EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment

PLL

2 Mb/s or 2 MHz

TCU

EQPT Clock supply to SRT 1F Equipment

a - Diagram of Synchronization Mode 1

Line CLK PRI 1

LC Selection (Max. 3)

PRI 2

to be selected according to Quality (SSMB) & Priority

PRI 3

EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz

T4 SSU

INT CLK Ext 2M CLK (X)

(Y)

EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment

EC Selection (Max. 2) to be selected according to Quality (SSMB) & Priority

PLL 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz

T0 TCU

EQPT Clock supply to SRT 1F Equipment

b - Diagram of Synchronization Mode 2 Figure 2.31 – Diagram of Synchronization

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-55

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 2.7.2.3

UMN

Clock Mode Two clock modes are available for TCU setting, the TCU mode and the THROUGH mode. TCU mode On the down stream (from the primary station to the end station), the equipment clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary station. On the up stream (from the end station to the primary station), the clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary station on the down stream. THROUGH mode On the down stream, the equipment clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from primary station. On the up stream, the clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the end station. TCU mode

THROUGH mode SRT 1F

SRT 1F

TCU

TCU

Down stream Primary station

End station Up stream

Figure 2.32 - Clock Mode of TCU 2.7.2.4

Quality Level (S1 byte) The quality level of the synchronization source is defined by the S1 byte of RSOH. The TCU selects best quality source as reference. Table 2.8 - S1 byte code and Quality level Quality Level

2-56

S1 byte

Quality description

bit 5

bit 6

bit 7

bit 8

2

0

0

1

0

Traceable to ITU-T G. 811 (Best quality)

3

0

1

0

0

Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 transit

4

1

0

0

0

Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 local

5

1

0

1

1

TCU internal clock

6

0

0

0

0

Quality unknown

6

1

1

1

1

Do not use for synchronization

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 2.7.2.5

Line Clock Priority Generally, the SRT 1F receives the reference clock from the incoming STM-1 signal. The SRT 1F facing the end station accepts the source from the Line side (Access ID = GP1-Wn-L, n= Main channel number), input to BSW unit. The SRT 1F facing the master station accepts the source from the Radio side (Access ID = GP1-Wn-R), the output of MSTU receiver. Figure 2.33 shows an example of line clock selection of the SDH radio system.

Master station

MUX

SRT 1F

SRT 1F

Line side GP1-Wn-L

Radio side GP1-Wn-R

MUX

SRT 1F

Line side GP1-Wn-L

SRT 1F

MUX

End station

Radio side GP1-Wn-R

Note: n = Main channel number Normally, Main 1 (n = 1) shall be selected as Priority 1 (PRI 1)

Figure 2.33 - Example of Line Clock Selection

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-57

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

2.7.3 2.7.3.1

UMN

Orderwire Applications Orderwire Extension The SRT 1F provides two modular jacks for orderwire telephone connection, E1 and E2. In addition, 4-wire VF terminals of E1 and E2 are provided for connection to external equipment.

2.7.3.2

Signal

4-wire Voice Frequency

Impedance

600 ohms balanced

Input Level

Standard -4.0 dBr -16.0 to -0.5 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step

Output Level

Standard -4.0 dBr -8.5 to +7.0 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step

Maximum Output Level

+3.17 dBmO for µ-law +3.14 dBmO for A-law

Digital-Through At repeater stations and back to back stations, orderwires can be forwarded as digital signal level when telephone sets are on-hook or not connected. When one of the telephone sets (E1 or E2) is off-hooked, both the E1 and E2 line are terminated and converted to the voice frequency level. Digital through function is provided to minimize the degradation of orderwires due to analog/digital conversion and noise/distortion intrusion at the analog signal level.

2.7.3.3

Ring Protection In case of ring network configuration, the orderwire lines establish a loop circuit. This loop circuit may cause the orderwire signal to self oscillate (hauling). To prevent hauling, a port of the orderwire circuit shall be disconnected at the master station. If any section of the loop was interrupted by line failure, the orderwire ring protection automatically reconnects the loop in order to recover the orderwire communication. Figure 2.34 shows the function of Orderwire Ring Protection.

2-58

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

Master station

Master station

These ports are disconnected to stop hauling.

VF circuit

VF circuit

Without Ring Protection

With Ring Protection

Line failure

VF circuit Master station In Case of Line Failure With Ring Protection These ports are reconnected to recover the orderwire circuit.

Figure 2.34 - Ring Protection

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

2-59

UMN

3

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION 3.1

Installation preliminaries In this chapter are described the SRT 1F rack installation procedures. Specifically: Storage

3.1.1

•

Preparation for unpacking

•

Unpacking procedure

Storage, Unpacking and Inspection This procedure describes the unpacking and inspection of the SRT 1F equipment. It assumes that all equipment has been received and that all data forms and job engineering drawings have been completed and are available.

3.1.1.1

Storage When the equipment is to be kept in storage, leave the equipment in the shipping containers. Store slide-in units in the special bags the units were originally shipped in. The bags are coated with a conductive material and will protect the slide-in units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Figure 3.1 shows examples of ESD warning labels.

Figure 3.1 - Electrostatic Discharge Warning Labels After unloading the containers, check the contents against the invoice sheet. Check containers for external damage, quantity and contents. If any defects or errors are found, immediately contact the person in charge for proper remedy. Do not leave the containers outdoors. Store the containers in a place provided with adequate roof cover which will protect the containers from rain and dust. Keep the containers in a dry place. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-1

3. INSTALLATION 3.1.1.2

UMN Preparation The unpacking site shall be protected from rain, water, dust etc. Prepare sufficient space for the unpacking site. Prepare the tools for the unpacking of the containers. The quantity of the equipment and installation materials should be checked while unpacking

3.1.1.3

Unpacking and Inspection Before unpacking the equipment, inspect the containers for any signs of damage that may have occurred during shipment. File any claims for shipping damage with the transportation company according to their published procedure. When unpacking the equipment, use the packing list that accompanies each shipment to determine that all items are present before continuing with the installation. Notify the nearest Siemens representative if there is a shortage of any kind.

3.1.1.4

General Unpacking Method 1. Cut the straps that hold the cover on the container. 2. Open the cover and pull out the sealed polythene bag. 3. Cut immediately under the seal with scissors or a knife. 4. Remove the equipment from the pack by gripping the protectors attached to the equipment. 5. Immediately check the contents, according to the invoice sheets. 6. Check if the component and parts have been damaged. 7. Notify the nearest Siemens representative if there is damage of any kind.

3.1.2

Storage of Spare Units Spare units are separately packed from other main frame units. These units should be kept in clean places avoiding high temperature and high humidity. These units are stored in the special bags which are coated with a conductive material and will protect spare units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). See Figure 3.1, for indication markings.

3-2

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.1.3

Accessories There are two kinds of accessories.

3.2 3.2.1

•

Installation, such as connector plugs or connector assembly,

•

Maintenance, according to the routine maintenance plan, maintenance accessories should be stored in the maintenance area.

Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers Warning and General Handling This procedure lists precautionary measures which must be followed when dealing with optical fibers and optical fiber components.

3.2.1.1

Tools Required No tools are required for this procedure.

3.2.1.2

Warning Messages The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment. WARNING Never look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fibre fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Figure 3.2 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units:

Figure 3.2 - Laser Warning Labels SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-3

3. INSTALLATION 3.2.1.3

UMN Storage 1. Protective caps are provided with the optical connectors of the optical cable (see Figure 3.3). 2. Do not expose the optical cables to direct sunlight. The recommended storage temperature is –10° to 60°C (14° to 140°F), and the maximum recommended relative humidity is 90%.

Figure 3.3 - Protective Cap (SC/PC Connector) 3.2.1.4

Handling 1. Do not pull the optical cable when the connector is attached to the optical unit (see Figure 3.4).

Figure 3.4 - Optical Cable Pulling 2. Take care not to bend or obstruct the optical cable (see Figure 3.5).

Figure 3.5 - Optical Cable Bending and Obstruction Limits

3-4

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3. Do not bend the optical cable at a radius of less than 50 mm (see Figure 3.6).

Figure 3.6 - Optical Cable Minimum Bending Radius 4. Do not twist the optical cable more than 360° per meter of length (see Figure 3.7).

Figure 3.7 - Optical Cable Twist Limits 5. Do not drop or step on the optical cable and do not subject it to excessive vibration (see Figure 3.8).

Figure 3.8 - Optical Cable Vibration and Shock Damage

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-5

3. INSTALLATION

3.2.2

UMN

Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables This procedure details the precautions which must be taken to preserve the integrity of optical connectors and cables during connection and disconnection.

3.2.2.1

Tools Required No tools are required for this procedure.

3.2.2.2

Preparation 1. Verify that there are no serious defects in the optical cables and connectors. 2. Clean the optical fibre end surface with a cotton swab soaked in alcohol.

3.2.2.3

Connection Procedure 1. While holding the connector body, insert the connector. Ensure the connector key engages.

3.2.2.4

Disconnection Procedure 1. Gently pull the connector body away from the optical coupling interface. Be careful not to pull or bend the optical cable. 2. Place a protective cap over the optical cable connector

3.2.3

Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors This section provides procedures for the cleaning of optical fibre cables and connectors.

3.2.3.1

Tools Required The tools required are: •

Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit (CLETOP Reel Type A) If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available use:

3-6

•

Pure alcohol

•

Mediswabs

•

Lens Cleaning Paper

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.2.3.2

Procedure If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is available: 1. Insert the connector into the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit. 2. Twist the connector back and forth. 3. Slide the connector down the slot in the cleaning kit. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in the other slot of the cleaning kit. 5. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in par. 3.2.4. If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available: 1. Use a Mediswab dampened with alcohol to clean the end of the fibre connector. 2. Allow the connector to air dry. 3. Wipe the end of the connector with lens cleaning paper. 4. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in the following point, Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors.

3.2.4 3.2.4.1

Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors Connector End-face Definitions The condition of the connector end-face is a significant factor for the long-term operation of the network. This procedure defines the requirements for the inspection of terminated optical fibres.

3.2.4.2

End-face Zone Definitions The connector end-face is divided into the following regions: •

core

•

cladding

For inspection purposes the cladding region is divided into internal and external areas. See Figure 3.9.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-7

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

Internal Cladding area Φ =62.5µ m External Cladding area Φ =125 µ m Adhesive Bond Ferrule Area Figure 3.9 - Connector End-face

3.2.4.3

Defect Definitions The following definitions apply:

3.2.4.4

•

a scratch defect is a linear extended surface mark

•

a pit defect is a localised surface mark

•

a crack defect is a stress fracture either wholly within the fibre or intersecting the fibre surface

•

a chip defect has material broken away from the fibre following the generation of crack defects

Scratch and Pit Defects The core region must be free from blemishes.

3-8

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.2.4.5

Chip Defects The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Figure 3.10 for acceptance criteria. Acceptable: Chip in outer cladding area only

Internal cladding area Unacceptable: Chip extends into inner cladding area

External cladding area Acceptable: Chip in outer cladding area only

Figure 3.10 - Chip Defects

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-9

3. INSTALLATION 3.2.4.6

UMN Crack Defects The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Figure 3.11 for acceptance criteria. Unacceptable: Crack extends for more than 25% of cladding circumference

Internal cladding area Unacceptable: Crack extends into inner cladding area

External cladding area Acceptable: Crack in outer cladding area only

Figure 3.11 - Crack Defects

3-10

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.2.4.7

Tools Required •

3.2.4.8

Fiberscope

Procedure To view the optical fiber connector: 1. Insert the connector into the Fiberscope, using the adapter if required. 2. Depress the trigger to turn the Fiberscope on. 3. Adjust the Fiberscope, if necessary, to position the image in the center of the viewing area, and focus. 4. Clean the connector face in accordance with par. 3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors, if required. 5. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria due to damage, the cable must be replaced. 6. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria after cleaning, and further cleaning is not effective, the cable must be replaced.

3.3

Rack Installation This chapter describes the precautions and the procedure required for the installation of the SRT 1F rack.

3.3.1

Precautions As a general precaution, installing sites should be selected as follows:

3.3.1.1

Suitable Places for Equipment Installation •

Do not install in places subject to vibration.

•

Do not install in dusty places.

•

Avoid places which becomes high in temperature. (recommended range 20°C to 40°C)

•

Install on a flat and level floor.

•

Do not eat or drink in the vicinity of the equipment

•

Keep away from strong electromagnetic fields.

•

When cleaning equipment, use a soft bristled brush and a vacuum cleaner with plastic nozzle or low pressure dry air.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-11

3. INSTALLATION

3.3.2

UMN

Safety Measures for Equipment Handling. Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage, or shipment. Such units are stamped with anti-electrostatic marks and require special care in handling and storage. When handling slide-in units for installation, removal or option setting, always wear a wrist strap which is connected to safety ground. Hold only the edge of slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units. Transport and store slide-in units in the special bags in which the units were originally shipped. Always fold the open end of the bag over and close it securely with tape. When returning units to Siemens use these special bags. Use the original shipping containers whenever possible. During installation or replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into slots. Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimize power surges during installation. Slow insertion will ensure that the slidein units are not damaged.

3.3.3

Tools Required Standard hand tools and socket wrench set are required. Wrist strap - to be worn at all times when handling circuit cards.

3.3.4

3-12

Preparation •

Use working gloves while installing and securing the equipment

•

According to the local plans and procedures, the main structure must already be installed before installation of the equipment begins.

•

Check and ensure that all civil works necessary for the installation of the equipment have been completed.

•

Ensure that these checks are made before the start of the installation work. If anything is wrong or incomplete, take corrective steps before starting the installation work.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.3.4.1

3.3.4.2

Bay Mounting •

When mounting the equipment rack, pay attention to other nearby equipment and keep enough space to erect the equipment rack.

•

Before mounting the rack, heavy units such as MSTU must be taken off. (originally, these are separately packed from the equipment rack, for safe transportation.)

•

Ensure that each unit is properly inserted and secured, otherwise the units will drop out of the shelf when mounting the bay upright

•

To avoid unexpected material from dropping off, remove in advance the material which easily mounts into the equipment rack.

Bay Securing •

Stand the rack in the vertical position at the designated bay layout. First securing the top of the rack, then the base.

•

Use the ratchet wrench and suitable length extension bar to tighten the bolts for fixing.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-13

3. INSTALLATION

3.3.5

UMN

Rack Configuration Figure 3.12 shows overview of SRT 1F radio equipment rack. Figure 3.13 shows the dimensions of the standard rack.

MSTU

SCSU

BBIU (OPTION)

Figure 3.12 - Overview of SRT 1F equipment rack

3-14

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

Figure 3.13 - Dimension of standard Rack

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-15

3. INSTALLATION

3.3.6

UMN

Shelf Configuration Figure 3.14 shows shelf configuration of MSTU. MSTU units are made to slide into the MSTU shelf via the plug-in adapter. DC power supply and RF signals connection between unit and shelf are plugged in via the plug-in adapter. Other signal connections such as baseband signals, supervision and control signals also plugged in via the multi-pin connector mounted on the BWB of the SCSU shelf.

MSTU Adapter

MSTU unit

MSTU shelf

MSTU Adapter

Slide in rail

Figure 3.14 - MSTU shelf and MSTU unit

3-16

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION Figure 3.15 and Figure 3.16 show overview of SCSU and BBIU shelf. Connectors for MSTU

Figure 3.15 - Overview of SCSU shelf

Figure 3.16 - Overview of BBIU shelf

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-17

3. INSTALLATION

3.3.7 3.3.7.1

UMN

How to Install Shelves & Units Preparation of Shelves SCSU : Remove connector covers of the channel to be installed (Figure 3.17).

Figure 3.17 - Remove connector covers

3-18

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION MSTU : Remove the MSTU Adapter from each MSTU (Figure 3.18). Remove two fittings from each MSTU Adapter (Figure 3.19) These fittings are for transportation and unit testing only. Install MSTU Adapters and Slide in Rails on to the shelf. (Figure 3.20)

Figure 3.18 – Remove MSTU

Adapter Figure 3.19 - Remove 2 Fittings

Figure 3.20 - Install MSTU Adapter and Slide in Rails

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-19

3. INSTALLATION

3.3.8

UMN

Mounting of Shelves Shelves should be mounted on to the rack in the given order.

Position

BBIU (if applicable), SCSU, MSTU then BRU (Figure 3.21and Figure 3.22).

BRU

MSTU

SCSU

Install BBIU first, then SCSU, MSTU and BRU. If BBIU is not applicable, leave the space for BBIU (498mm H) + cabling space (approx. 70 mm), then start mounting the SCSU, MSTU and BRU. BBIU

Figure 3.21

3-20

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

4 x 3 X 6S

4 x 4 X 8S 2 x 3 X 6S

Figure 3.22 – Screew together the MSTU and SCSU

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-21

3. INSTALLATION 3.3.8.1

UMN Mounting of Slide-In Units Slide-in units are locked to the shelf through latches. To remove a slide in unit (SIU), lift latching levers and pull out the slide in unit. To mount a SIU, lift latching levers first, then slide in the unit firmly and close latching levers ascertaining that the levers engage into the shelf securely. Full size SIUs have 2 latches both at the top and at the bottom. To mount an SIU, ascertain that 2 levers are engaging to the shelf evenly when closing latching levers. Installing an MSTU : An MSTU is equipped with 2 mounting screws. When installing an MSTU, remove the front cover first. Then turn 2 screws evenly by lightly pressing the middle of the MSTU. Do not slam the unit.

Figure 3.23 – Full size unit mounting

3-22

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION Do not slam the unit.

Figure 3.24 – Half size unit mounting Half size SIUs have only one latch at the bottom. To remove/mount an SIU, remove a guard rail from the shelf first as shown at the top left.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-23

3. INSTALLATION

UMN Figure 3.25 to Figure 3.26 show typical cable laying for inter-shelf connection.

DC power supply Cable

Figure 3.25 - Cable laying of MSTU shelf

External signal line

Inter shelf connection cable DC power supply cable

Figure 3.26 - Cable laying of SCSU shelf

3-24

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

Optical fiber cable

DC power supply cable Inter shelf connection External signal lines

Figure 3.27 - Cable laying of BBIU shelf

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-25

3. INSTALLATION

3.4

UMN

Inter Shelf Connections This chapter provides information on the inter shelf connections and customer interface connections between SRT 1F equipment and the customer’s equipment.

3.4.1

SRT 1F Input The equipment can operate one of followings five Base Band interface conditions. Base Band Interface Unit are optionally supplied for STM-1 optical interface operation and PDH E4 interface operation. 1. MSTU unit for STM-1 electrical interface One MSTU unit per channel may be used 2. OPT S-11P unit for STM-1 optical interface S-1.1 A maximum of two OPT S-11P units per channel may be used. 3. OPT L-11P unit for STM-1 optical interface L-1.1 A maximum of two OPT L-11P units per channel may be used.

3.4.1.1

Warning Messages The following safety precautions must be observed when installing or maintaining the waveguide. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment. Figure 3.28 shows the warning labels that are attached on all emitting and receiving units:

Figure 3.28 - Warning Labels

3-26

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.4.2

Waveguide Connection Figure 3.29 shows the location of the antenna port on SRT 1F radio equipment.

Vertical CH 1, 3, 5, 7

Horizontal CH 2, 4, 6, 8

MAIN

SD

SD

MAIN

(a) Alternated Operation

Vertical CH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 MAIN

Horizontal CH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 SD

MAIN

SD

(b) Co-channel Operation and independent use of rack by V / H polarization

Vertical CH 1, 2, 3, 4

Horizontal CH 1, 2, 3, 4

MAIN

SD

SD

MAIN

(c) Co-channel Operation and common use of rack by V / H polarization

TOP of ETSI rack

TOP of Waveguides

59.4

2190.7

BRU Figure 3.29 - Antenna port location on top of the rack

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-27

3. INSTALLATION 3.4.2.1

3-28

UMN Tools Required •

Standard hand tools

•

Step ladder for connecting wave guide

•

Ratchet type set of socket wrenches

•

Waveguide Allen keys

•

Torque wrench for waveguide Allen keys

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.4.2.2

Preparation Do not connect feeder to the equipment until all the twists in the feeder have been corrected. See Figure 3.30 A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out the installation of the feeder to the equipment. Refer to the wave guide installation manual.

Figure 3.30 - Twisting Wave guides 3.4.2.3

Precautions When the wave guides are connected to the radio equipment, pay attention not to apply a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment side. Refer to the wave guide installation manual.

3.4.3

Connection of Primary Power Lead This section provides procedures for installing DC power and ground cables in the equipment rack and it shows the office power input terminal identification. There are two methods for DC power cable installation. As shown in Figure 3.31, one is that the DC power distribution board and the DC power connector of each unit and shelf is directly connected. As shown in Figure 3.32, the other is that the DC power from DC power distribution board is received by the optionally supplied PDU (Power Distribution Unit) then distributed to each unit and shelf.

3.4.3.1

Tools Required •

Standard hand tools

•

DMM (Digital Multi-Meter)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-29

3. INSTALLATION

UMN -48V DC Power for MSTU, SCSU, BBIU from Office Power Supply

Crimping terminal

DC power for SCSU

Power cable

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

AMP Connector

- V2 IN

BSW 7

CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42 CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35

CN 11

CN 31

CN 72

CN76

CN 79

CN77

[M6 M6] M6

BB INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

[M4 M4] M4

CN 68

CN 74

CN78

[M3 M3] M3

BB INTF X

CN 73

CN 67

CN 24

BB INTF Y

CN 22

CN 66

CN 17

[M2 M2] M2

CN 32

CN 65

CN 14

MSPSW 7

CN 23

MSPSW 5

CN 21

MSPSW 4

CN 16

CN75

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF P BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 15

CN 13

MSPSW 3

BBIU

MSPSW 2

- V2 IN

MSPSW 1

- V1 IN

CN 12

MSPSW6

SCSU

DC power for BBIU

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40

[M7 M7] M7

Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply.

Figure 3.31 - DC power connection to the rack.

3-30

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

D C P ow er D istribution B oard of O ffice Pow er S upply

AMP Crimping Terminal P D U (O PTIO N ) CN 12

CN 11

CN 10

CN 9

CN 8

CN 7

CN 6

CN 5

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2

CN 1

AMP Connector

AMP Connector

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P ]

[M M 1]

[M M 2]

[M M 3]

[M M 4]

[M M 5]

[M M 6]

[M M 7]

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

- V2 IN

C N 40 C N 41 C N 42

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

Power cable

- V1 IN

AMP Connector

C N 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

C N 44 C N 45 C N 33 C N 34 C N 35

SCSU C N 11

C N 23

C N 14

C N 17

C N 22

C N 24

C N 31

CN 68

[M M 6]

BB INTF Y

[M M 5]

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF X

CN 67

C N 77

[M M 4]

BB INTF Y

C N 76

C N 79

[M M 3]

CN 66

C N 74

C N 72

[M M 2]

C N 32

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

C N 73

C N 78

BB INTF Y

[M M 1]

C N 21

C N 75

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF P

BBC

AMP Connector

C N 16

MSPSW 4

B B IU

C N 15

C N 13

MSPSW 3

- V2 IN

MSPSW 2

MSPSW 1

- V1 IN

C N 12

[M M 7]

Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply.

Figure 3.32 - DC power connection to the rack with PDU

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-31

3. INSTALLATION 3.4.3.2

UMN Procedure Prepare power lead and crimping terminal as specified on the local plan. Main DC power distribution board side •

Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 3.33 for details)

•

Crimp terminal by using die.

•

Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the equipment cable inlet through the cable rack.

Equipment side •

Assemble the AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory.

Figure 3.33 shows the cable sheath and terminal connection.

Recommendable cable AWG 4

Figure 3.33 - Cable Sheath 1. Disconnect office power or remove fuses from bay fuse panel and use a voltmeter to ensure that the supply rail is at zero volts (with reference to the earth ground). 2. Connect the red (0 V) lead to the battery return terminal of the power distribution board. 3. Connect the blue (–48 V) lead to the –48V terminal. 4. Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the equipment cable inlet through the cable rack. 5. Structure AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory. 6. Connect the AMP connector to the DC power connector of the unit/shelf. 7. Reconnect office power or re-install fuses.

3-32

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.4.3.3

Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment The crimping method (Solderless) shall be applied only to the power wiring connecting terminal and to the indoor connection branching. Only annealed copper is only used for this method. See Figure 3.34 for crimping method. Crimping Method 1. Choose the die fit for the cross-section area of the terminal to use. 2. Insert the terminal into the die section of the instrument and press the terminal till it does not slip off. Then set the soldering portion of the terminal body opposite to the male die while inserting the terminal body to the center of the die. Take care not to deform the terminal when compressing it. 3. Start crimping the terminal after having ascertained that vary the relative position of terminal and die 4. Insulating treatment at the compressed portion. This treatment shall be performed as follows: •

More than 1 mm in width on the insulated sheath will be sealed. Wind PVC tape with a half width tape pitch as required.

Figure 3.34 shows the method for crimping the terminal and the cable conductor.

Figure 3.34 - Method of Crimping 3.4.3.4

Precautions 1. This equipment has the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Frame Ground (FG) terminal. Therefore, if your station has an ESD Ground terminal, connect to them. If not possible, connect to the FG of each equipment to keep the same voltage level as FG. 2. While connecting the power lead, do not drop in any cable sheathing or cable fragments. It may cause short circuits or faulty units. 3. Ensure that the cable is connected before turning on the main breaker.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-33

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.4.4

AMP hand Crimping Tool This section provides application procedures for AMP hand crimping tools. Figure 3.35 shows over view of AMP hand crimping Tool 23470-1, which crimps the AMP Dynamic D-5 loose-piece tab and receptacle contacts listed in Figure 3.36. The front of the tool, into which the wire is inserted, is AMP marked. Wire Size Marking and the Contact Series marking on it. The contact is inserted into the Back of the tool. The tool features two fixed dies (crimper), two movable dies (anvils), a locator/insulation stop, and a CERTI-CRIMP ratchet. The locator/insulation stop has two functions: first, it positions the contact between the crimper and anvil before crimping; and second, it limits insertion distance of the stripped wire into the contact. In use, it rests in the locator slot of the contact. The CERTICRIMP ratchet assures full crimping of the contact. Once engaged the ratchet will not release until the handles have been fully closed.

Contact series name

FRONT OF TOOL CRIMPER

Wire Size ANVIL

Tool No.

CIRTI-CRIMP RATCHET

Figure 3.35 - AMP hand Crimping Tool

3-34

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

WIRE STRIP LENGTH 4.5 ~ 5.0

CONTACT Series: D-5(S) WIRE SIZE

CONTACT NO.:

316041-3

AWG: 16-14 2 Sq.(mm ): 1.23-2.27

Front of Tool(Wire Size) Locator / Insulation stop Contact Series Name

Contact

Wire Slot in Locator

Contact series Name

Wire Size

Wire Barrel

Stripped Wire

Locator slot (in contact)

Tool No.

Insulation Barrel

Figure 3.36 - AMP hand Crimping Method

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-35

3. INSTALLATION 3.4.4.1

UMN CRIMPING PROCEDURES 1.

Hold the tool so FRONT is facing you.

2.

Make sure ratchet is released by squeezing the tool handles and allowing them to open Fully.

3.

Holding contact by its mating portion and looking straight into front of the crimp section, insert contact from the back into die set. Position contact between crimpers so locator mates the locator slot.

4.

Holding contact in this position, squeeze tool handles together until insulation barrel anvil starts entry into insulation crimper. DO NOT deform insulation barrel or wire barrel.

5.

Insert a properly stripped wire through the wire slot in locator and into wire barrel of contact until insulation butts against the locator/insulation stop.

6.

Holding wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Use both hands after the wire is fixed.

7.

Allow tool handles to open fully. Remove ped contact from tool.

CAUTION: Care shall be taken to ensure that the contact is set at the right position (shown in Figure 3.37) so as to properly crimp the contact.

CRIMPER LOCATOR

ANVIL

(a) Right Position

(b) Wrong Position

Figure 3.37 - Right position for satisfactory crimping

3-36

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.4.4.2

Assembling of AMP Connector After crimping the AMP contacts, assemble the Rese-housing of the AMP connectors. Refer to Figure 3.38.

Insertion

AMP crimping contact

AMP rese-housing Type: 1-1-179958-2 Figure 3.38 - Assembling of AMP connector 3.4.4.3

Office Power Supply Check This procedure verifies the office power for the SRT 1F radio equipment.

3.4.4.4

3.4.4.5

Tools Required •

Standard hand tools

•

Digital Multi Meter (DMM)

Procedure 1. Remove the PWR connector from the station interface area (SIA). 2. Set the DMM scale to the 200 VDC range. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to Pin 1 of the connector and the negative lead to Pin 2 of the connector. 4. Verify that the voltage is between –38.4V DC and –57.6V DC for – 48V DC system. If it is not, contact the installation team. 5. Disconnect the DMM leads and connect the PWR connector to the SIA.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-37

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.4.5

Frame Grounding Figure 3.39 shows the Frame Ground connection of the SRT 1F radio equipment rack. The Frame Ground of the equipment rack should be connected to the station ground bus at the right top corner of the SCSU shelf. In addition to the connection, Frame Ground connection between shelf also should be done.

BRU

Frame Ground

Frame Ground

Connection

Connection - V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

Frame Ground

- V IN

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

Connection

-V IN

-V IN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42

Frame Ground Connection Frame Ground Connection to

CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35

CN 11

CN 21

CN 31

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 68

CN 77

[M6 M6] M6

Frame Ground Connection

BB INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

CN 67

CN 76

CN 79

[M4 M4] M4

BB INTF Y

CN 72

[M3 M3] M3

CN 66

CN 74

CN 78

[M2 M2] M2

CN 32

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

CN 73

CN 75

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF P BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 16

MSPSW 4

Connection

CN 15

CN 13

MSPSW 3

-V IN

MSPSW 2

-V IN

MSPSW 1

Frame Ground

CN 12

[M7 M7] M7

Figure 3.39 - Frame Ground of the Equipment Rack

3-38

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.4.6

Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F installation. Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn Up procedures.

3.4.7

Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors The SMA semi rigid coaxial connectors are pre-formed to exact lengths to establish connection between the branch filter and the MSTU plug-in Adapter. The transmitter output and receiver input are connected to the branching network through the MSTU plug-in Adapter shown in Figure 3.40. Pay attention when fitting or removing the semi rigid coaxial connectors. Use the torque wrench with a 21/Ncm setting. Unscrew each end before trying to remove the connector.

MSTU plug-in Adapter

SMA Connector MN RX IN

SD RX IN

TX OUT Top view of MSTU plug-in Adapter

MSTU

Figure 3.40 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-39

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

MAIN (V)

SD (V)

TX

PROT

CH 5’ RX BPF

CH 1’

CH 7’

SDRX MNRX

MNRX

TX

MAIN-3 RX

MAIN-2 RX

MAIN-1 RX

PROT

RX

CH 3’

RX BPF MAIN-3 RX

CH 7’

RX BPF

CH 5’

CH 1’ RX

MAIN-1 RX

PROT

MAIN-3 TX

MAIN-2 RX

CH 3’

TX BPF CH 7

TX BPF CH 3 MAIN-2 TX

TX PROT

MAIN-1 TX

SDRX

MNRX

RX BPF

CH 5

CH 1

BRU

SDRX TX

MAIN-1

MAIN-2

SDRX

MNRX

TX

MAIN-3

MSTU

Figure 3.41 - Semi-rigid Cable connection between BRU and MSTU (Example for 3+1, Alternated Operation)

3-40

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.4.8

Inter shelf Connection for RPS, SV, and DCC Inter shelf connection shown in Figure 3.42 is necessary for (N+1) radio protection switching (RPS), supervision (SV), and digital communication channel (DCC). PDU(OPTION)

PDU(OPTION) CN 12

CN 11

- V IN

CN 10

- V IN

CN 9

- V IN

CN 8

- V IN

CN 7

CN 6

CN 5

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2

CN 1

CN 12

CN 11

CN 10

CN 9

CN 8

CN 7

CN 6

CN 5

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2

CN 1

BRU

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

MSTU 9

MSTU 10

MSTU 11

MSTU 12

MSTU 13

MSTU 14

MSTU 15

MSTU 16

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

BSW 14

CN 42 CN 43

CN 45 CN 33

CN 44

OCC INTF

BSW INTF

CN 44

CN 45 CN 33

CN 34

CN 34

CN 35

CN 35

CN 12

CN 15

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

- V2 IN

BSW 13

BSW 12

BSW 11

- V1 IN

CN 41

CN 43

CN 31

CN 32

SCSU CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 73

BBIU

CN 72

CN 76

CN 78

CN 79

CN 77

CD304

BBIU

CN 72

CN 76

CN 78

CN 79

CN 77

CD308

OPT INTF 30

[M6 M6] M6

OPT INTF 29 or PE INTF 16

OPT INTF 28

[M5 M5] M5

CD304 OPT INTF 27 or PE INTF 15

OPT INTF 26

[M4 M4] M4

OPT INTF 25 or PE INTF 14

OPT INTF 24

[M3 M3] M3

OPT INTF 23 or PE INTF 13

OPT INTF 22

[M2 M2] M2

OPT INTF 21 or PE INTF 12

OPT INTF 20

[M1 M1] M1

CN 75

OPT INTF 19 or PE INTF 11

OPT INTF 18

OPT INTF 17 or PE INTF 10

BBC

[M7 M7] M7

OPT INTF 16 or PE INTF 9

OPT INTF 15

[M6 M6] M6

OPT INTF 14 or PE INTF 8

OPT INTF 13

[M4 M4] M5] M4 [M5 M5

CN 32

CN 74

OPT INTF 12 or PE INTF 7

OPT INTF 11

OPT INTF 10 or PE INTF 6

OPT INTF 9

[M3 M3] M3

OPT INTF 8 or PE INTF 5

OPT INTF 7

[M2 M2] M2

OPT INTF 6 or PE INTF 4

OPT INTF 5

OPT INTF 4 or PE INTF 3

OPT INTF 3

OPT INTF 2 or PE INTF 2

BBC

OPT INTF 1 or PE INTF 1

[M1 M1] M1

CN 75

CN 31

CN 73

CD308

CN 74

- V2 IN

CN 40

CN 42

SV

CN 11

BSW 10

CN 53

CN 53

CN 41

- V1 IN

BSW 9

CN 40

OCC INTF

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

SCSU

- V2 IN

BSW 8

ECU 2

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

ECU 1

- V1 IN

[M7 M7] M7

nd nd To operate 2 RPS, remove the cables CD304 and CD 308 to the 2 RPS rack.

Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply. Figure 3.42 - Inter shelf Connection for Radio Protection Switching, Supervision, and Digital Communication Channel (DCC)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-41

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.4.9

Baseband Signal Cable Connection

3.4.9.1

STM-1 electrical signal Interface Figure 3.43 shows the STM-1 electrical interface baseband signal connection done on BSW (Baseband Switch) unit front panel. Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance is 75 ohms and unbalanced.

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

STM-1(156M) CMI IN MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

- V2 IN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

STM-1(156M) CMI OUT

IN WS-S

Wayside Signal IN/OUT

OUT

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42 CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45

IN

CN 33 CN 34

WS-R

CN 35

OUT SCSU CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 31

CN 32

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

Front View of BSW unit BBIU

Figure 3.43 - STM-1 electrical signal interface baseband signal connection

3-42

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.4.9.2

STM-1 optical signal Interface Figure 3.44 shows inter shelf connection of the baseband signal and Figure 3.45 shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between SRT 1F radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment done on the PCB of the OPT INTF (Optical signal Interface) unit. Optical Fiber connector is of the FC type and are accessed from the front of the equipment rack.

BSW 1 BSW 2 BSW3

BRU

BSW 7 CMI IN CMI OUT

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

STM-1 MSTU 8

MSTU 7

MSTU 6

MSTU 5

MSTU 4

MSTU 3

MSTU 2

MSTU 1

STM-1 [P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

CMI IN

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

CMI OUT

- V2 IN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

OCC INTF

CN 42 CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35

SCSU CN 11

CN 16

CN 21

CN 31

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 77

[M6 M6] M6

OPT INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF X

CN 68

CN 79

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF Y

CN 78

[M4 M4] M4

CN 67

CN 76

[M3 M3] M3

CN 66

CN 74

CN 72

[M2 M2] M2

CN 32

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

MSPSW 4

CN 73

CN 75

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF P BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 15

CN 13

MSPSW 3

BBIU

MSPSW 2

- V2 IN

MSPSW 1

- V1 IN

CN 12

OCC OUT

OCC IN

[M7 M7] M7

MSP SW:

1

2

3

7

Figure 3.44 - Inter shelf connection of baseband signal

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-43

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

To/from Optical Fiber Transmission Equipment

BRU

STM-1 - V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

STM-1

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

- V2 IN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42 CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33

Optical cable Connector

CN 34 CN 35

CN 16

CN 21

CN 31

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

[M6 M6] M6

OPT INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF X

CN 68

CN 77

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF Y

CN 79

[M4 M4] M4

CN 67

CN 76

CN 78

[M3 M3] M3

CN 66

CN 74

CN 72

[M2 M2] M2

CN 32

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

MSPSW 4

CN 73

CN 75

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF P BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 15

CN 13

MSPSW 3

BBIU

MSPSW 2

- V2 IN

MSPSW 1

- V1 IN

CN 12

IN

CN 11

OUT

SCSU

[M7 M7] M7

To/from Unit

Front View of

Side View of OPT INTF unit

OPT INTF unit

Figure 3.45 - STM-1 connection between SRT 1F radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment

3-44

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.4.10

Wayside Signal Cable Connection Figure 3.46 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection done on the front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch) unit. Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance is 75 ohms and unbalanced.

BRU

Front View of BSW unit

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

STM-1(156M) CMI IN MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

- V2 IN

WS-S OUT

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42 CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33

CN 35

CN 11

IN

CN 40

CN 34

SCSU

STM-1(156M) CMI OUT

CN 12

CN 15

CN 31

CN 32

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

BBIU

IN WS-R OUT

Wayside Signal IN/OUT (HDB3, 75 ohms, unbalance)

Wayside Signal IN/OUT(HDB3, 12 ohms, balance) See Chapter 5, section 5.11, PIN assignment

Figure 3.46 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-45

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.4.11

Inter shelf connection for CO-channel operation For co-channel operation, inter shelf connection shown in Figure 3.47 or Figure 3.48 are necessary for XPIC operation. Figure 3.47 is applied when that V/H equipment is installed in a separate rack and Figure 3.48 is applied when the V/H equipment is installed in the same rack.

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

MSTU 9

MSTU 10

MSTU 11

MSTU 12

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

XPIC

MSTU 8 OUT

MSTU 16

MSTU 7 OUT

XPIC

MSTU 6 OUT

MSTU 15

MSTU 5 OUT

XPIC

MSTU 4 OUT

MSTU 14

MSTU 3 OUT

XPIC

MSTU 2 OUT

MSTU 13

MSTU 1 OUT

IN

IN

IN

IN

[ 1st Radio Protection System ] [ 2nd Radio Protection System ] BRU

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

MSTU 9

MSTU 10

MSTU 11

MSTU 12

MSTU 13

MSTU 14

MSTU 15

MSTU 16

[P ]

[M1 M1] M1

[M M 2] 2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

[P ]

[M M 1] 1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M M 4] 4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

- V1 IN

- V2 IN

CN 40

BSW 14

BSW 13

BSW 12

BSW 11

BSW 10

BSW 9

CN 41

BSW 8

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40

CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42

CN 42

CN 43

CN 43

CN 44

CN 45 CN 33

OCC INTF

BSW INTF

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44

CN 34

CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35

CN 35

SCSU CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

BBIU

CN 31

CN 32

- V2 IN

No power supply is required for SCSU of 2nd RPS

SCSU CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 31

CN 23

CN 32

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

BBIU

Figure 3.47 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel operation (V / H equipment installed in separate rack)

3-46

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

REF

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

I/O

MSTU 9

MSTU 10

MSTU 11

MSTU 12

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

XPIC

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

IN

OUT

OUT

OUT

OUT

XPIC

MSTU 8 OUT

MSTU 16

MSTU 7 OUT

XPIC

MSTU 6 OUT

MSTU 15

MSTU 5 OUT

XPIC

MSTU 4 OUT

MSTU 14

MSTU 3 OUT

XPIC

MSTU 2 OUT

MSTU 13

MSTU 1 OUT

IN

IN

IN

IN

[ 1st Radio Protection System ] [ 2nd Radio Protection System ]

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

MSTU 9

MSTU 10

MSTU 11

MSTU 12

MSTU 13

MSTU 14

MSTU 15

MSTU 16

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

- V2 IN

BSW 14

BSW 13

BSW 12

BSW 11

BSW 10

BSW 9

CN 41

BSW 8

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40

- V1 IN

CN 40 CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42

CN 42

CN 43

CN 43 CN 44

CN 45 CN 33 CN 34

OCC INTF

BSW INTF

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44

CN 45 CN 33 CN 34

CN 35

SCSU CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 31

CN 32

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

BBIU

- V2 IN

No power supply is required for SCSU of 2nd RPS

CN 35

SCSU CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 31

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 32

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

BBIU

Figure 3.48 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel operation (V / H equipment installed in the same rack)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-47

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.5

Connector and Connector Pin Assignment This chapter provides information on the connector and connector pin assignments.

3.5.1

Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB) Figure 3.49 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack and Figure 3.50 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of 2×(7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack. PDU(OPTION) CN 12

CN 11

CN 10

CN 9

CN 8

CN 7

CN 6

CN 5

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2

CN 1

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

SV

HK 2

HK 1

CN 4

TCU Y

TCU X

CN 2

ECU 2

CN 4

CN 42 CN 43 CN 44

OCC INTF

CN 3

ECU 1

Detail

CN 1

CN 45 CN 33 CN 34

CN 5

CN 35

SCSU

CN 11

CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 31

CN 68

CN 77

[M6 M6] M6

BB INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF X

CN 76

CN 79

[M4 M4] M4

CN 67

CN 72

CN 78

[M3 M3] M3

BB INTF Y

CN 74

CN 75

[M2 M2] M2

CN 66

CN 73

CN 32

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

MSPSW 4

MSPSW 3

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

[M1 M1] M1

MSPSW 2

BBIU

BB INTF P BBC

CN

- V2 IN

MSPSW 1

- V1 IN

CN

- V2 IN

[M7 M7] M7

Detail

Figure 3.49 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack

3-48

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

1st Radio Protection System

2nd Radio Protection System

PDU(OPTION)

PDU(OPTION) CN 12

CN 11

- V IN

CN 10

- V IN

CN 9

- V IN

CN 8

- V IN

CN 7

CN 6

CN 5

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2

CN 1

CN 12

CN 11

CN 10

CN 9

CN 8

CN 7

CN 6

CN 5

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2

CN 1

BRU

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

MSTU 9

MSTU 10

MSTU 11

MSTU 12

MSTU 13

MSTU 14

MSTU 15

MSTU 16

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

- V1 IN

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 32

SCSU CN 11

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 31

CN 68

[M6 M6] M6

BB INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF X

CN 67

CN 77

[M4 M4] M4

BB INTF Y

CN 76

CN 79

[M3 M3] M3

CN 66

CN 74

CN 78

[M2 M2] M2

CN 32

CN 65

MSPSW 15

MSPSW 13

MSPSW 12

MSPSW 11

CN 73

CN 72

BB INTF Y

[M1 M1] M1

CN 15

CN 13

CN 75

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF P

[M7 M7] M7

BBC

BB INTF Y

[M6 M6] M6

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

BBIU

CN 12

MSPSW 10

CN 77

MSPSW 9

-V2 IN

MSPSW 8

CN 68

CN 67

CN 66

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

MSPSW 4

- V1 IN

CN 74

CN 79

OCC INTF

CN 14

[M4 M4] M4

BSW 14

BSW INTF

CN 35

CN 23

CN 78

CN 33

CN 35

CN 31

CN 76

CN 45

CN 34

CN 21

CN 72

CN 44

CN 34

CN 16

[M3 M3] M3

BSW 13

BSW 12

BSW 11

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 33

CN 15

[M2 M2] M2

CN 43

CN 45

CN 75

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF P

BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 42

CN 44

CN 13

*

CN 41

CN 43

CN 73

- V2 IN

CN 40

CN 42

CN 12

MSPSW 3

BBIU

MSPSW 2

- V2 IN

MSPSW 1

- V1 IN

BSW 10

CN 41

BSW 9

CN 40

OCC INTF

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

CN 11

- V1 IN

BSW 8

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

SCSU

- V2 IN

[M7 M7] M7

* Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply. Figure 3.50 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of 2× ×(7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-49

3. INSTALLATION 3.5.1.1

UMN Connectors on the BWB of SCSU Table 3.1 lists all the connectors on the BWB of SCSU. Table 3.1 - Connectors on the BWB of SCSU

CN No.

3-50

Description

Remarks

Connector Type

CN 1

EXT SX

Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3)

27CP coaxial

CN 2

EXT SY

Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3)

27CP coaxial

CN 3

T4 SX

Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3)

27CP coaxial

CN 4

T4 SY

Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3)

27CP coaxial

CN 5

T0SX

Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3)

27CP coaxial

CN 6

T0 SY

Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3)

27CP coaxial

CN 11

WS/UC 1

Wayside/User channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 12

WS/UC 2

Wayside/User channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 13

WS/UC 3

Wayside/User channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 14

WS/UC 4

Wayside/User channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 15

WS/UC 5

Wayside/User channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 16

WS/UC 6

Wayside/User channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 17

WS/UC 7

Wayside/User channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 21

HK 2

Housekeeping (DI/DO)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 22

HK 3

Housekeeping (DI/DO)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 23

HK 4

Housekeeping (DI/DO)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 24

HK 5

Housekeeping (DI/DO)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 31

RAB

Rack Alarm BUS

Dsub 15 multi-pin

CN 32

EOW

Engineering Order Wire

Dsub 15 multi-pin

CN 33

RUC

Radio User Channel

Dsub 25 multi-pin

CN 34

HK 1

Housekeeping (DI/DO)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 35

OSSI

Operation Support System

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 40

S-INTF 1

Serial Interface 1

DHA80 multi-pin

CN 41

S-INTF 2

Serial Interface 2

DHA80 multi-pin

CN 42

SSMB 1

Synchronous State Message Byte BUS

DHA40 multi-pin

CN 43

SSMB 2

Synchronous State Message Byte BUS

DHA40 multi-pin

CN 44

CM-BUS

Channel Management BUS

DHA68 multi-pin

CN 45

EOW

Engineering Order Wire

DHA68 multi-pin

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION 3.5.1.2

Connectors on the BWB of BBIU Table 3.2 lists all the connectors on the BWB of BBIU are listed up. Table 3.2 - Connectors on the BWB of BBIU

CN No.

Description

Remarks

Connector Type

CN 65

UC 1, 2

User Channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 66

UC 3, 4

User Channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 67

UC 5, 6

User Channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 68

UC 7

User Channel (F1 byte)

Dsub 37 multi-pin

CN 72

EOW IN

Engineering Order Wire Input

DHA68 multi-pin

CN 73

EOW OUT

Engineering Order Wire Output

DHA68 multi-pin

CN 74

EOW TERM

CN 75

CMB IN

Channel Management BUS IN

DHA68 multi-pin

CN 76

CMB OUT

Channel Management BUS OUT

DHA68 multi-pin

CN 77

CMB TERM

CN 78

SSMB

Synchronous Status Management Byte BUS

DHA40 multi-pin

CN 79

DCC

Data Communication Channel

DHA80 multi-pin

CN 80

OCC OUT

Occasional signal Output

27CP coaxial

CN 81

OCC IN

Occasional signal Input

27CP coaxial

DHA68 multi-pin

DHA68 multi-pin

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-51

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.5.2

Connector PIN assignment for OSSI Table 3.3 shows the Connector PIN assignment for OSSI.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

OSSI

SCSU-CN35

Dsub 37

Table 3.3 - Connector PIN assignment for OSSI PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No. 19

37

SG

Signal Ground

36 35

B-B element timing (B)

SG

Signal Ground

OSSTC1 A(O)

B-B element timing (A)

16

34

15

33

14

32

13

OSSDCD A( I )

Carrier Detected (A)

31

OSSDCD B(I)

R Carrier Detected (B)

12

OSSDTR A(O)

Data Term. Ready (A)

30

OSSDTR B(O)

Data Term. Ready (B)

11

OSSDSR A( I )

Data Set Ready (A)

29

OSSDSR B(I)

Data Set Ready (B)

10 9

OSSCTS A( I )

Clear to SEND (A)

28 27

OSSCTS B(I)

Clear to SEND (B)

8

OSSRXC A( I )

R element timing (A)

26

OSSRXC B(I)

R element timing (B)

7

OSSRTS A(O)

Request to SEND (A)

25

OSSRTS B(O)

Request to SEND (B)

6

OSSRXD A( I )

RX DATA (A)

24

OSSRXD B(I)

RX DATA (B)

5

OSSTC2 A( I )

T element timing (A)

23

OSSTC2 B(I)

T element timing (B)

4

OSSTXD A(O)

TX DATA (A)

22

OSSTXD B(O)

TX DATA (B)

3

FG

Frame Ground

21

2

20

1

37

20

3-52

Remarks

18 17

OSSTC1 B(O)

Description

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.3

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1 Table 3.4 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK1.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

HK1

SCSU-CN34

Dsub 37

Table 3.4 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1 PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

Remarks

19 37

18

36

17

35

16

34

15

33

14

DO-4C

Housekeeping OUT-4C

32

DO-4N

Housekeeping OUT-4N

13

DO-3C

Housekeeping OUT-3C

31

DO-3N

Housekeeping OUT-3N

12

DO-2C

Housekeeping OUT-2C

30

DO-2N

Housekeeping OUT-2N

11

DO-1C

Housekeeping OUT-1C

29

DO-1N

Housekeeping OUT-1N

10

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

28

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

9

SDA SG

Signal Ground for Monitor

27

8

SD AGC

SD AGC monitor (W1)

26

7

AGC SG

Signal Ground for Monitor

25

6

AGC MON

AGC monitor (W1)

24

5

DI-7

Housekeeping IN-7

23

DI-8

Housekeeping IN-8

4

DI-5

Housekeeping IN-5

22

DI-6

Housekeeping IN-6

3

DI-3

Housekeeping IN-3

21

DI-4

Housekeeping IN-4

2

DI-1

Housekeeping IN-1

20

DI-2

Housekeeping IN-2

1

FG

Frame Ground

37

20

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-53

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.5.4

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 2 Table 3.5 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK2.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

HK2

SCSU-CN21

Dsub 37

Table 3.5 - Connector PIN assignment for HK2 PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

Remarks

19 37

HK1 DO-8C

Housekeeping OUT-8C

36

HK1 DO-8N

Housekeeping OUT-8N

17

HK1 DO-7C

Housekeeping OUT-7C

35

HK1 DO-7N

Housekeeping OUT-7N

16

HK1 DO-6C

Housekeeping OUT-6C

34

HK1 DO-6N

Housekeeping OUT-6N

15

HK1 DO-5C

Housekeeping OUT-5C

33

HK1 DO-5N

Housekeeping OUT-5N

14

HK1 DO-4C

Housekeeping OUT-4C

32

HK1 DO-4N

Housekeeping OUT-4N

13

HK1 DO-3C

Housekeeping OUT-3C

31

HK1 DO-3N

Housekeeping OUT-3N

12

HK1 DO-2C

Housekeeping OUT-2C

30

HK1 DO-2N

Housekeeping OUT-2N

11

HK1 DO-1C

Housekeeping OUT-1C

29

HK1 DO-1N

Housekeeping OUT-1N

10

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

28

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

9

HK1 DI-15

Housekeeping IN-15

27

HK1 DI-16

Housekeeping IN-16

8

HK1 DI-13

Housekeeping IN-13

26

HK1 DI-14

Housekeeping IN-14

7

HK1 DI-11

Housekeeping IN-11

25

HK1 DI-12

Housekeeping IN-12

6

HK1 DI-9

Housekeeping IN-9

24

HK1 DI-10

Housekeeping IN-10

5

HK1 DI-7

Housekeeping IN-7

23

HK1 DI-8

Housekeeping IN-8

4

HK1 DI-5

Housekeeping IN-5

22

HK1 DI-6

Housekeeping IN-6

3

HK1 DI-3

Housekeeping IN-3

21

HK1 DI-4

Housekeeping IN-4

2

HK1 DI-1

Housekeeping IN-1

20

HK1 DI-2

Housekeeping IN-2

1

FG

Frame Ground

37

20

3-54

18

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.5

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 3 Table 3.6 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK3.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

HK3

SCSU-CN22

Dsub 37

Table 3.6 - Connector PIN assignment for HK3 PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

Remarks

19 37

18

HK1 DO-16C

Housekeeping OUT-16C

36

HK1 DO-16N

Housekeeping OUT-16N

17

HK1 DO-15C

Housekeeping OUT-15C

35

HK1 DO-15N

Housekeeping OUT-15N

16

HK1 DO-14C

Housekeeping OUT-14C

34

HK1 DO-14N

Housekeeping OUT-14N

15

HK1 DO-13C

Housekeeping OUT-13C

33

HK1 DO-13N

Housekeeping OUT-13N

14

HK1 DO-12C

Housekeeping OUT-12C

32

HK1 DO-12N

Housekeeping OUT-12N

13

HK1 DO-11C

Housekeeping OUT-11C

31

HK1 DO-11N

Housekeeping OUT-11N

12

HK1 DO-10C

Housekeeping OUT-10C

30

HK1 DO-10N

Housekeeping OUT-10N

11

HK1 DO-9C

Housekeeping OUT-9C

29

HK1 DO-9N

Housekeeping OUT-9N

10

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

28

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

9

HK1 DI-31

Housekeeping IN-31

27

HK1 DI-32

Housekeeping IN-32

8

HK1 DI-29

Housekeeping IN-29

26

HK1 DI-30

Housekeeping IN-30

7

HK1 DI-27

Housekeeping IN-27

25

HK1 DI-28

Housekeeping IN-28

6

HK1 DI-25

Housekeeping IN-25

24

HK1 DI-26

Housekeeping IN-26

5

HK1 DI-23

Housekeeping IN-23

23

HK1 DI-24

Housekeeping IN-24

4

HK1 DI-21

Housekeeping IN-21

22

HK1 DI-22

Housekeeping IN-22

3

HK1 DI-19

Housekeeping IN-19

21

HK1DI-20

Housekeeping IN-20

2

HK1 DI-17

Housekeeping IN-17

20

HK1DI-18

Housekeeping IN-18

1

FG

Frame Ground

37

20

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-55

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.5.6

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 4 Table 3.7 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK4.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

HK4

SCSU-CN23

Dsub 37

Table 3.7 - Connector PIN assignment for HK4 PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

Remarks

19 37

HK2 DO-8C

Housekeeping OUT-8C

36

HK2 DO-8N

Housekeeping OUT-8N

17

HK2 DO-7C

Housekeeping OUT-7C

35

HK2 DO-7N

Housekeeping OUT-7N

16

HK2 DO-6C

Housekeeping OUT-6C

34

HK2 DO-6N

Housekeeping OUT-6N

15

HK2 DO-5C

Housekeeping OUT-5C

33

HK2 DO-5N

Housekeeping OUT-5N

14

HK2 DO-4C

Housekeeping OUT-4C

32

HK2 DO-4N

Housekeeping OUT-4N

13

HK2 DO-3C

Housekeeping OUT-3C

31

HK2 DO-3N

Housekeeping OUT-3N

12

HK2 DO-2C

Housekeeping OUT-2C

30

HK2 DO-2N

Housekeeping OUT-2N

11

HK2 DO-1C

Housekeeping OUT-1C

29

HK2 DO-1N

Housekeeping OUT-1N

10

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

28

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

9

HK2 DI-15

Housekeeping IN-15

27

HK2 DI-16

Housekeeping IN-16

8

HK2 DI-13

Housekeeping IN-13

26

HK2 DI-14

Housekeeping IN-14

7

HK2 DI-11

Housekeeping IN-11

25

HK2 DI-12

Housekeeping IN-12

6

HK2 DI-9

Housekeeping IN-9

24

HK2 DI-10

Housekeeping IN-10

5

HK2 DI-7

Housekeeping IN-7

23

HK2 DI-8

Housekeeping IN-8

4

HK2 DI-5

Housekeeping IN-5

22

HK2 DI-6

Housekeeping IN-6

3

HK2 DI-3

Housekeeping IN-3

21

HK2 DI-4

Housekeeping IN-4

2

HK2 DI-1

Housekeeping IN-1

20

HK2 DI-2

Housekeeping IN-2

1

FG

Frame Ground

37

20

3-56

18

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.7

Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 5 Table 3.8 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK5.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

HK5

SCSU-CN24

Dsub 37

Table 3.8 - Connector PIN assignment for HK5 PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Descriptio n

Remarks

18

HK2 DO-16C

Housekeeping OUT-16C

19 37 36

HK2 DO-16N

Housekeeping OUT-16N

17

HK2 DO-15C

Housekeeping OUT-15C

35

HK2 DO-15N

Housekeeping OUT-15N

16

HK2 DO-14C

Housekeeping OUT-14C

34

HK2 DO-14N

Housekeeping OUT-14N

15

HK2 DO-13C

Housekeeping OUT-13C

33

HK2 DO-13N

Housekeeping OUT-13N

14

HK2 DO-12C

Housekeeping OUT-12C

32

HK2 DO-12N

Housekeeping OUT-12N

13

HK2 DO-11C

Housekeeping OUT-11C

31

HK2 DO-11N

Housekeeping OUT-11N

12

HK2 DO-10C

Housekeeping OUT-10C

30

HK2 DO-10N

Housekeeping OUT-10N

11

HK2 DO-9C

Housekeeping OUT-9C

29

HK2 DO-9N

Housekeeping OUT-9N

10

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

28

HK-Common

HK Common Ground

9

HK2 DI-31

Housekeeping IN-31

27

HK2 DI-32

Housekeeping IN-32

8

HK2 DI-29

Housekeeping IN-29

26

HK2 DI-30

Housekeeping IN-30

7

HK2 DI-27

Housekeeping IN-27

25

HK2 DI-28

Housekeeping IN-28

6

HK2 DI-25

Housekeeping IN-25

24

HK2 DI-26

Housekeeping IN-26

5

HK2 DI-23

Housekeeping IN-23

23

HK2 DI-24

Housekeeping IN-24

4

HK2 DI-21

Housekeeping IN-21

22

HK2 DI-22

Housekeeping IN-22

3

HK2 DI-19

Housekeeping IN-19

21

HK2 DI-20

Housekeeping IN-20

2

HK2 DI-17

Housekeeping IN-17

20

HK2 DI-18

Housekeeping IN-18

1

FG

Frame Ground

37

20

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-57

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.8

UMN

Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel Table 3.9 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RUC.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

RUC

SCSU-CN33

Dsub 25

Table 3.9 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

Remarks

13

SG

Signal Ground

25

SG

Signal Ground

12

U1R CKN (O)

CH1 R CLK N (OUT)

24

U2R CKN (O)

CH2 R CLK N (OUT)

11

U1R CKP (O)

CH1 R CLK P (OUT)

23

U2R CKP (O)

CH2 R CLK P (OUT)

10

SG

Signal Ground

22

SG

Signal Ground

9

U1R DN ( I )

CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR

21

U2R DN ( I )

CH2 T DATA N (IN) 4WR

8

U1R DP ( I )

CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR

20

U2R DP ( I )

CH2 T DATA P (IN) 4WR

7

SG

Signal Ground

19

SG

Signal Ground

6

U1T CKN (O)

CH1 T CLK N (OUT)

18

U2T CKN (O)

CH2 T CLK N (OUT)

5

U1T CKP (O)

CH1 T CLK P (OUT)

17

U2T CKP (O)

CH2 R CLK P (OUT)

4

SG

Signal Ground

16

SG

Signal Ground

3

U1T DN (O)

CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS

15

U2T DN (O)

CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS

2

U1T DP (O)

CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS

14

U2T DP (O)

CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS

1

FG

Frame Ground

25

14

3-58

13

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.9

Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS Table 3.10 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

RAB

SCSU-CN31

Dsub 15

Table 3.10 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

8

COMMON

Remarks

15

*ACO IN

ACO Ground line

7

VIS MN

Visible Miner alarm

14

ACO IN

Alarm Cut Off IN

6

AUD MN

Audible Miner alarm

13

NE ALM-N

NE alarm (N)

5

VIS MJ

Visible Major alarm

12

NE ALM-C

NE alarm ©

4

AUD MJ

Audible Major alarm

11

RAB-MNT

Maintenance

3

VIS CR

Visible Critical alarm

10

VIS WR

Visible Warning

2

AUD CR

Audible Critical alarm

9

AUD WR

Audible Warning

1

FG

Frame Ground

15

9

8

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-59

3. INSTALLATION

UMN

3.5.10

Connector PIN assignment for EOW Table 3.11 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

EOW

SCSU-CN32

Dsub 15

Table 3.11 - Connector PIN assignment for EOW PIN No.

Description

PIN No.

Description

Remarks

8

E2 IN T (IN)

4WR E2ch T

15

E2 IN R(IN)

4WR E2ch R

7

E2-OUT T (OUT)

4WS E2ch T

14

E2-OUT R(OUT)

4WS E2ch R

6

CALL2-C

Calling E2 common

13

CALL2-N

Calling E2-N-line

5

SG

Signal Ground

12

SG

Signal Ground

4

CALL1-C

Calling E1 common

11

CALL1-N

Calling E1-N-line

3

E1-IN T(IN)

4WR E1ch T

10

E1-IN R(IN)

4WR E1ch R

2

E1-OUT T (O)

4WS E1ch T

9

E1-OUT R(O)

4WS E1ch R

1

FG

Frame Ground

15 9

3-60

Remarks

8

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.11

Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC Table 3.12 shows the Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

WS/UC 1

SCSU-CN11

Dsub 37

WS/UC 2

SCSU-CN12

Dsub 37

WS/UC 3

SCSU-CN13

Dsub 37

WS/UC 4

SCSU-CN14

Dsub 37

WS/UC 5

SCSU-CN15

Dsub 37

WS/UC 6

SCSU-CN16

Dsub 37

WS/UC 7

SCSU-CN17

Dsub 37

Table 3.12 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No. 19

Description SG

Remarks Signal Ground

37

SG

Signal Ground

18

SG

Signal Ground

36

SG

Signal Ground

17

SUC LRCN (O)

LINE side RCLK (N)

35

SUC RTCN (O)

RADIO side TCLK (N)

16

SUC LRCP (O)

LINE side RCLK (P)

34

SUC RTCP (O)

RADIO side TCLK (P)

15

SUC LRDN ( I )

LINE side RDATA(N)

33

SUC RTDN (O)

RADIO side TDATA(N)

14

SUC LRDP ( I )

LINE side RDATA(P)

32

SUC RTDP (O)

RADIO side TDATA(P)

13

SG

Signal Ground

31

SG

Signal Ground

12

SG

Signal Ground

30

SG

Signal Ground

11

WSR OUT N (O)

RFCOH WS OUT (N)

29

SUC RRCN (O)

RADIO side RCLK (N)

10

WSR OUT P (O)

RFCOH WS OUT (P)

28

SUC RRCP (O)

RADIO side RCLK (P)

9

WSR IN N ( I )

RFCOH WS IN (N)

27

SUC RRDN ( I )

RADIO side RDATA(N)

8

WSR IN P ( I )

RFCOH WS IN (P)

26

SUC RRDP ( I )

RADIO side RDATA(P)

7

SG

Signal Ground

25

SG

Signal Ground

6

SG

Signal Ground

24

SG

Signal Ground

5

WSS OUT N (O)

SOH WS OUT (N)

23

SUC LTCN (O)

LINE side TCLK (N)

4

WSS OUT P (O)

SOH WS OUT (P)

22

SUC LTCP (O)

LINE side TCLK (P)

3

WSS IN N ( I )

SOH WS IN (N)

21

SUC LTDN (O)

LINE side TDATA (N)

2

WSS IN P ( I )

SOH WS IN (P)

20

SUC LTDP (O)

LINE side TDATA (P)

1

SG

Signal Ground

37

20

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-61

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.12

UMN

Connector PIN assignment for User Channel Table 3.13 shows the Connector PIN assignment for UC.

Use Access Name

Connector No. on BWB

Type of Connector

UC 1, 2

BBIU-CN65

Dsub 37

UC 3, 4

BBIU-CN66

Dsub 37

UC 5, 6

BBIU-CN67

Dsub 37

UC 7

BBIU-CN68

Dsub 37

Table 3.13 - Connector PIN assignment for UC PIN No.

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

Remarks

19

SG

Signal Ground

37

SG

Signal Ground

18

SG

Signal Ground

36

LRXUCDT N2

LINE RX DATA (N) 2

17

LRXUCDT N1

LINE RX DATA (N) 1

35

LRXUCDT P2

LINE RX DATA (P) 2

16

LRXUCDT P1

LINE RX DATA (P) 1

34

LRXUCCLK N2

LINE RX CLK (N) 2

15

LRXUCCLK N1

LINE RX CLK (N) 1

33

LRXUCCLK P2

LINE RX CLK (P) 2

14

LRXUCCLK P1

LINE RX CLK (P) 1

32

LTXUCDT N2

LINE TX DATA (N) 2

13

LTXUCDT N1

LINE TX DATA (N) 1

31

LTXUCDT P2

LINE TX DATA (P) 2

12

LTXUCDT P1

LINE TX DATA (P) 1

30

LTXUCCLK N2

LINE TX CLK (N) 2

11

LTXUCCLK N1

LINE TX CLK (N) 1

29

LTXUCCLK P2

LINE TX CLK (P) 2

10

LTXUCCLK P1

LINE TX CLK (P) 1

28

RRXUCDT N2

RADIO RX DATA (N) 2

9

RRXUCDT N1

RADIO RX DATA (N) 1

27

RRXUCDT P2

RADIO RX DATA (P) 2

8

RRXUCDT P1

RADIO RX DATA (P) 1

26

RRXUCCLK N2

RADIO RX CLK (N) 2

7

RRXUCCLK N1

RADIO RX CLK (N) 1

25

RRXUCCLK P2

RADIO RX CLK (P) 2

6

RRXUCCLK P1

RADIO RX CLK (P) 1

24

RTXUCDT N2

RADIO TX DATA (N) 2

5

RTXUCDT N1

RADIO TX DATA (N) 1

23

RTXUCDT P2

RADIO TX DATA (P) 2

4

RTXUCDT P1

RADIO TX DATA (P) 1

22

RTXUCCLK N2

RADIO TX CLK (N) 2

3

RTXUCCLK N1

RADIO TX CLK (N) 1

21

RTXUCCLK P2

RADIO TX CLK (P) 2

2

RTXUCCLK P1

RADIO TX CLK (P) 1

20

SG

Signal Ground

1

SG

Signal Ground

37

20

3-62

19

1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

3. INSTALLATION

3.5.13

Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock Coaxial Connectors, CN 1 to CN 6, located on BWB of the SCSU are used for IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set through LCT.

Table 3.14 - Coaxial Connectors for External Synchronization Signal CN No.

Description

Remarks

CN 1

EXT SX

Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system

CN 2

EXT SY

Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system

CN 3

T4 SX

Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system

CN 4

T4 SY

Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system

CN 5

T0 SX

Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system

CN 6

T0 SY

Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3-63

UMN

4

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.1

ACCEPTANCE OF THE SRT 1F Acceptance tests are performed to ensure that proper installation procedures detailed in Chapter 3, have been followed. Acceptance tests verify the following: •

Proper power wiring has been provided to the bay

•

Equipment shelves are free of defects or damage

Factory-wired power circuits are properly connected. The acceptance tests generally assume:

4.1.1

•

Accurate and concise system designations and office records are available to properly identify systems and equipment

•

Any faults found and not corrected during testing are referred to the installation group responsible

•

The test equipment required is available, properly tested and working correctly

Perform Overall Visual Inspection 1.

Locate the SRT 1F rack and bay that will house the equipment.

2.

Place yourself facing the rack.

3.

Check that no slide-in units are installed. Remove any units that are installed.

4.

Check that the shelves are secure and free of defects or damage.

5.

Check that all electrical connectors inside the shelves are properly secured and aligned in the shelf slots.

6.

Check that there are no broken, bent or mis-aligned contacts in the connectors.

7.

Check that there are no mis-aligned, dented or twisted shelves.

8.

Check that there is no broken or damaged (connectors, wiring, back wired boards, etc.).

9.

Check that all cabling and wiring is terminated and secured in place.

10.

Check that the wiring from the central office battery supply is connected to the power connector on the SRT 1F rack.

11.

Check that the plug from the office alarm system is connected to the SRT 1F rack alarm bus connector (CN31 on BWB of SCSU).

12.

Check that the SRT 1F rack connections to the equipment outside of the bay have been made.

13.

Check that the feeder connections are properly terminated.

14.

Record the inspection results

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

equipment

4-1

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Note:

4.1.2

UMN Report any problems to the installation group.

Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack This procedure lists the steps required to check the incoming power supply to the SRT 1F rack. Before beginning this procedure, turn on the main power supply and check that the fuse assigned to the shelf is inserted properly.

4.1.2.1

Test Equipment Required Digital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalent.

4.1.2.2

Procedure 1.

Turn off the all No-Fuse Breakers on the units and shelves.

2.

Unplug all the power connectors from all the units and shelves equipped on the rack.

3.

Confirm the voltage between the –48V and Battery return terminals in the power connector. –38.4 V DC and –57.6 V DC for –48V system

4.

If OK continue with Step 5. If NO report the problem to the installation group.

5.

Re plug in all the power connectors.

6.

Turn on all the No-Fuse Breakers on the units and shelves.

Violet

Minus Power cable

Plus

48 V

Black

AMP connector: 1-79958-2

Figure 4.1 - SRT 1F PWR Connector

4-2

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.2

Installation of the SRT 1F Slide-in Units This chapter provides instructions to install the various units into the SRT 1F rack.

4.2.1

Warning Messages The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment.

4.2.1.1

Laser Warning WARNING Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Figure 4.2 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units: DANGER Invisible laser radiation from connectors when uncoupled. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. Figure 4.2 - Laser Warning Labels

4.2.1.2

Electrostatic Discharge Warning CAUTION Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4.3) and require special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be strictly observed:

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-3

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling slide-in units. The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 kΩ. Before using the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum resistance value. Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks. Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units. Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and secure with tape. Return units to Siemens in special bags and original shipping containers.

Figure 4.3 - ESD Warning Labels

4-4

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.2.2

Slide-In Installation Procedures This procedure assumes that: 1. The equipment rack has been installed in accordance with local procedures. 2. The SRT 1F rack has been installed and connected according to the procedure described in par. Connector and Connector Pin Assignment. 3. The procedures described in par. 4.1, Acceptance of SRT 1F rack have been performed. This procedure is provided as a guide to equipping the SRT 1F rack.

4.2.3

Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units This section details the procedures to be followed for the insertion and removal of all slide-in units. Warning During replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into the slot. Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimise power surges during unit replacement. A slow insertion method will ensure that the slide-in units are not damaged.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-5

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.2.3.1

UMN

Inserting a Slide-In Unit 1. If required, set the option switches and straps on the unit to customer requirements. These settings are detailed in the par. 4.8.2. 2. Ensure the card extractor levers are fully open, then slowly press the unit into the correct mounting slot. Carefully close the top and bottom extractor levers with both hands, until they latch, to set the unit in the backboard connectors. 3. The backboard connectors are keyed to accept only the card assigned to that position. See Figure 4.4.

Figure 4.4 - Inserting a Slide-in Unit Attention Do not slam the unit into the shelf. It may damage connectors.

4-6

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.2.3.2

Removing a Slide-In Unit 1. Locate the slide-in unit to be removed. 2. Gently pull open the top and bottom extractor levers until the slide-in unit is free from the rear connector (see Figure 4.5). If the unit is hard to remove, gently push the card in, then raise the extractor levers. Do not force the levers open. See Figure 4.5. 3. Carefully remove the slide-in unit from the mounting shelf.

Figure 4.5 - Removing a Slide-in Unit Figure 4.6 shows a detailed description of the extraction levers.

Figure 4.6 - Detail of an Extractor Lever

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-7

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.2.3.3

UMN

Removing an Optical Unit

Note:

1.

Gently pull the top and bottom extractor levers out with both hands until the unit is pulled free from the backboard connector.

2.

Slowly pull the unit until it is stopped by the card stopper located at the bottom edge of the card.

3.

Disconnect the optical fiber cords if they are connected to the unit. An instruction label is located on the Optical Interface unit. This label is visible when the unit is partially removed.

4.

Fit the protection caps to the optical fiber connectors and on the unit if they are not already fitted with the protection caps.

5.

Lift the metal spring on the card stopper and remove the unit completely out of the shelf. See Figure 4.7.

Care must be taken when removing units with optical fiber cables connected to prevent undue stress being placed on the fiber cables. See par Optical Circuits, Fiber Optic Cables and Jumpers for optical fiber cable handling procedures.

01570

Figure 4.7 - Removing an Optical Unit

4-8

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.2.4

Installing the MSTU Unit 1. Slide the MSTU unit into its appropriate position in the MSTU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Figure 3.14 of par. Shelf Configuration. All of signal connections such as TX output power, RX input signal, Baseband signal, and DC power supply, are plugged in. 2. Fasten the front locking screws finger tight. Attention When you install the MSTU unit:

4.2.5

•

Do not slam the unit.

•

Tighten two locking screws at top and bottom lightly pressing the middle of the unit.

alternately while

Installing SCSU Unit 1. Slide the SCSU unit, SV, BSW, HK, TCU, ECU, into its appropriate position in the SCSU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Figure 3.15 of par. Shelf Configuration. 2. Confirm that it has been firmly plugged in.

4.2.6

Installing BBIU Unit 1. Slide the BBIU unit, PE INTF, BBC, MSP SW into its appropriate position in the BBIU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Figure 3.16 of par. Shelf Configuration. 2. Confirm that it has been firmly plugged in.

4.2.7 4.2.7.1

Installing the Optical Interface (OPT INTF) Unit Procedure 1. Slide the optical interface unit into its appropriate position in the appropriate shelf with a slow but firm motion. 2. Remove the protective cap from the fiber patch cord. 3.

Insert the fiber patch cords to their respective In and Out positions.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-9

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.3

UMN

SRT 1F Acceptance and Turn-Up Tests This chapter outlines the Acceptance and Turn-Up tests required to commission the SRT 1F.

4.3.1

Warning Messages The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of the equipment.

4.3.1.1

Laser Warning WARNING Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Figure 4.8 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units: DANGER Invisible laser radiation from connectors when uncoupled. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. Figure 4.8 - Laser Warning Labels

4.3.1.2

Inserting Plug–in Units CAUTION During installation or replacement, seat all slide-in units with a slow but firm action. Do not push them quickly into a slot. Many slide-in units have longer power connector pins to minimise power surges during installation. Insert the slide-in units slowly to avoid damage. Refer to par. 4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-In Units for unit installation and removal procedures.

4-10

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.3.1.3

Electrostatic Discharge Warning CAUTION Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4.9) and require special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be strictly observed: Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling plug-in units. The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 kΩ. Before using the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum resistance value. Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks. Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units. Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and secure with tape. Return units to Siemens in special bags and original shipping containers.

Figure 4.9 - ESD Warning Labels

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-11

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.3.2

UMN

SRT 1F In-Station, Inter-Station and End to End Tests

Task Name

Manual Reference

Note

In Station Tests

Hardware Settings

Par. 4.5.1

Software Settings

Par. 4.5.2

Transmit Local OSC Frequency

Par. 4.5.3

Transmit Output Power Level

Par. 4.5.4

Transmit Spectrum

Par. 4.5.5

AGC Range

Par. 4.5.6

Optical Output Power

Par. 4.5.7

MAX / MIN Receive (RX) Level

Par. 4.5.8

External Clock

Par. 4.5.9

Rack Alarm Test

Par. 4.5.10

Inter- Station Tests

RX Signal Level

Par. 4.6.1

IF- IF Test

Par. 4.6.2

IF DADE Test

Par. 4.6.3

ATPC

Par. 4.6.4

End to End Station Tests

4-12

DCC Test

Par. 4.7.1

Radio Protection (RPS) Switch

Par. 4.7.2

Wayside Signal Transmission Test

Par. 4.7.3

BER Characteristics Test

Par. 4.7.4

Stability Test (Residual BER)

Par. 4.7.5

Sync Source Switching

Par. 4.7.6

MSP Switching

Par. 4.7.7

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.3.3

Test Equipment Required The following test equipment is required to carry out the commissioning tests: •

RF power meter with 50 Ω and 75 Ω leads

•

Spectrum Analyzer

•

Network Analyzer with sweep generator or equivalent

•

Microwave link analyzer (70 MHz)

•

Variable attenuator for RF

•

Miscellaneous RF / IF cables and accessories

•

STM-1 transmission analyzer

•

Variable optical attenuator with SC connectors connectors with 2×FC/PC to SC patch cords)

•

Optical power meters with SC connector (or FC/PC connector with one FC/PC to FC/PC patch cords)

•

Frequency counter for RF.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

(or FC/PC

4-13

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.4

UMN

Waveguide and Antenna Alignment Tests

4.4.1

Waveguide Sweeping

4.4.1.1

Procedure for Return Loss Measurement

Network Analyzer

Sweeper

Antenna

Waveguide Adapter

Detector Divider

Detector

Directional Coupler

Waveguide Waveguide Transducer

Figure 4.10 - Return Loss Measurement 1. Connect the test equipment to the Waveguide as shown in Figure 4.10. (a)

The output of the sweep generator connects to the input of the divider.

(b)

One output of the divider connects to the directional coupler and the other port of the divider connects via a detector to the network analyzer reference input.

(c)

The output (forward) connection of the directional coupler connects to the waveguide adapter

(d)

The reflected port of the coupler connects via a detector to the input of the network analyzer.

2. Calibrate the network analyzer (cal menu) using the waveguide short. 3. Configure the network analyzer for a sweep range of the allocated radio frequency band. 4. Attach the waveguide transition to the waveguide adapter and read the reflected power directly from the display on the network analyzer. The waveguide transition must be tuned to achieve a basically flat response (as close as possible to flat), of less than –20 dBm (theoretical value is –20 to –40 dBm). Refer to Table 4.1 for theoretical return loss calculation data.

4-14

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

NOTE: When sweeping waveguide on the drum, a sliding load must be inserted into the open end of the waveguide to form a temporary termination (simulation of the antenna). Table 4.1 - Theoretical return loss calculation data Return Loss(dB)

Reflection Coefficient (%)

VSWR

14.0

19.95

1.50

15.0

17.78

1.43

16.0

15.85

1.38

17.0

14.13

1.33

18.0

12.59

1.29

19.0

11.22

1.25

20.0

10.00

1.222

21.0

8.93

1.196

22.0

7.943

1.173

23.0

7.079

1.152

24.0

6.310

1.135

25.0

5.563

1.119

26.0

5.012

1.106

27.0

4.467

1.094

28.0

3.981

1.083

29.0

3.548

1.074

30.0

3.162

1.065

35.0

1.778

1.036

40.0

1.000

1.020

45.0

.05623

1.011

Conversion Formulas Return Loss: Reflection Coefficient:

RL = −20log(ïΓï) ïΓï = (VSWR − 1) ⁄ (VSWR + 1)

Voltage Standing Wave Ratio: VSWR = (1+ïΓï) ⁄ (1−ïΓï)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-15

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.4.2

UMN

Antenna Alignment 1. Align the antenna in both planes according to the site drawings (elevation angle will have to be calculated from the height above sea level). If site data is not available, adjust the antenna for 0 elevation. 2. Pan the antenna in the horizontal plane and have a second party to check the RX or AGC voltage (using a spectrum analyzer) for the distant site’s signature. When the signature is detected, pan the antenna through the peak signal level and locate the first minima to the left and right of the peak. Note the number of turns of the adjusting screw between the minima, actual peak signal is EXACTLY half way between the two minima. 3. Pan the antenna in the vertical plane in the same manner as above, when complete lock the antenna panning bars and secure.

4.4.2.1

AGC Current Monitoring AGC current of Main 1 channel (W1 CH) Main/SD receiver can be monitored through the connector CN34 of SCSU for antenna alignment and future troubleshooting. Table 4.2 - AGC Current Monitoring Terminal

37

20

CN34 of SCSU for HK1

19 Pin No.

Name

Function

9

SDA SG

Signal Ground for Monitor

8

SD AGC

SD AGC monitor (W1)

7

AGC SG

Signal Ground for Monitor

6

AGC MON

AGC monitor (W1)

1

CN34 of SCSU accommodates housekeeping supervisory/control terminals in addition to AGC monitoring.

4-16

(external)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.4.2.2

Antenna XPIC Optimization 1. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the Horizontal waveguide, look for the signature of the distant site, the level should be at least 30 dB below the received signal level of the Vertical polarization. Typically, the receive level will be –35 dBm therefore the cross polar receive level should be –65 dB or less. 2. Rotate the feed point on the antenna ( both at the local and remote sites ) to achieve maximum cross polar discrimination, the preferred level is > 35 dB (antenna specification for HPX10-44D is > 30 dB). 3. Lock the feed mounting hub after achieving maximum cross polar discrimination.

4.4.3

Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F installation. Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn-Up procedures.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-17

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5

UMN

SRT 1F In-Station Performance Tests This chapter provides instructions for In Station Testing of the SRT 1F radio equipment.

4.5.1 4.5.1.1

Hardware Settings Default Values This section describes each hardware setting for the SRT 1F radio. These hardware settings are used only for Siemens factory option.These hardware settings should not be touched unless otherwise specified.

Note:

4.5.2 4.5.2.1

Report any problems to the installation group.

Provisioning (Software Settings) Default Values These provisioning items allow the user to make permanent changes in the NE. Do not change these provisioning settings unless otherwise specified.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

Caution: Default values displayed on LCT screens are initial setting values for hardware/software design, design, but not for your system setting. If you select Default values on a LCT screen accidentally, the system might not function properly.

4-18

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.3

Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency This test is to check the TX local OSC frequency of MSTU unit.

4.5.3.1

Equipment Required

4.5.3.2

•

HP5342A Frequency counter or equivalent

•

LCT (Local terminal)

Specification Within ± 10 ppm.

Tolerance

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

-V IN

-V IN

ON OFF

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

POWER ON/OFF

CN 40

Frequency

CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

Counter

CN 42 CN 43

TX F MON

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35

SCSU CN 11

CN 12

CN 15

CN 13

CN 16

CN 21

CN 31

CN 23

CN 32

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

BBIU

Figure 4.11 - TX Local Frequency Measurement

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-19

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.5.3.3

UMN

Test Procedure 1. Allow the frequency counter at least 30 minutes to warm up. 2. The BAND SELECT SW on the frequency counter shall be set to the specified frequency band (RF band). 3. Set up the test circuit as shown in Figure 4.11. 4. Record the TX local carrier frequency results. 5. Compare the results with Table 4.3.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

Table 4.3 - TX Local OSC Frequency for example (5 GHz Band) RF CH No

RF Frequency (MHz)

LO Frequency (MHz)

Tolerance (kHz) ± 10 ppm

1

4430.0

3586.0

±35.9

2

4470.0

3626.0

±36.3

3

4510.0

3666.0

±36.7

4

4550.0

3706.0

±37.1

5

4590.0

3746.0

±37.5

6

4630.0

3786.0

±37.9

7

4670.0

3826.0

±38.3

1’

4730.0

3886.0

±38.9

2’

4770.0

3926.0

±39.3

3’

4810.0

3966.0

±39.7

4’

4850.0

4006.0

±40.1

5’

4890.0

4046.0

±40.5

6’

4930.0

4086.0

±40.9

7’

4970.0

4126.0

±41.3

Note: Other radio frequency should be referred to the par. Frequency Plan and Antenna System.

4-20

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.4

Transmit Output Power Level This test is to check the output power of the TX unit.

4.5.4.1

4.5.4.2

4.5.4.3

Equipment Required •

HP436A/HP8481A Power meter with sensor or equivalent.

•

HP8491A Fixed attenuator (30dB) or equivalent.

•

LCT

Specification TX output power

+32 dBm ± 1 dB for 4 GHz to L8 GHz band

TX output power

+29 dBm ± 1 dB for 11 GHz band

TX output power

+27 dBm ± 1 dB for 13 GHz band

Test Procedure

Top view of MSTU Adapter

BRU

SMA Connector MN RX IN SD RX IN PSW

PSW

PSW

PSW

T LO

T LO

T LO

T LO

TX OUT

POWER

ATT 30 dB

SCSU

METER +30 ~ -30 dBm / 50Ω

BBIU

Figure 4.12 - TX Output Power Measurement

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-21

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

TX Output Power Measurement Procedure 1. Turn off power SW of the MSTU. 2. Remove the RF OUT cable 3. Connect power meter into the RF OUT. If the maximum range of the power meter is less than the rated output power level of the TX, insert fixed and calibrated attenuator between the TX output and the power meter. 4. Turn on power SW of the MSTU. 5. Read the power meter indication. 6. If the measured power is out of the rated level, log-on LCT. 7. Go to “Status/Control”Þ“Maintenance Radio Interface”Þ“Change Maintenance State”. 8. Set the MSTU under test in Maintenance State 9. Go to “Transmit Power Adjustment”. 10. Control UP-DOWN button to set the rated output power level(*). 11. Log off LCT. (*) This command should be used carefully and only for adjustment ≤ 1 dB TX Output Power Monitoring Procedure

Note:

4-22

1.

Log on LCT to the SRT 1F.

2.

Go to “Status Control”Þ“Analog Monitor”Þ“Display Current Level”

3.

Request the latest data.

4.

Confirm the displayed data.

5.

When the power level is out of the rated power ±3 dB, TX alarm will be reported.

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.5

Transmit Spectrum This test checks the TX Spectrum

4.5.5.1

Equipment Required •

4.5.5.2

Spectrum Analyzer.

Specification dB + 10 + 1.0

64 QAM , 40 M H z spacing 0 17.5 MHz + 1 dB

- 10 - 20 - 30 - 40

27.5MHz - 35 dB

- 50 - 60 - 70

42.5MHz - 65 dB

- 80

0

5

10

15

20 25 30 35 RF Frequency (MHz)

40

45

50

dB + 10 + 1.0

128 QAM , 28, 29, 30 M H z spacing

0 13 MH z + 1 dB

- 10 - 20 - 30 - 40

21 MH z - 35 dB

- 50 - 60 - 70

31.5 MHz - 65 dB

- 80

0

5

10

15

20 25 30 35 RF Frequency (MHz)

40

45

50

Figure 4.13 - Transmitter Output Spectrum

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-23

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.5.5.3

UMN

Test Procedure 1. Turn off all MSTU Power SWs. 2. Remove the TX output cable (thick line on Figure 4.14) from the circulator on the TX BPF in BRU unit. 3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the circulator output. 4. Turn on the Power SW of the MTSU under test. 5. Compare the results to the specification (use Delta markers or mask) 6. Turn off the Power SW for next channel measurement. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for other channels 8. Restore the connections. 9. Turn on all MSTU power SWs.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

MSTU Front View Example of detail configuration of BRU for 1+1, with SD System SD (V)

MAIN (V)

B　 　 R　 　 U

CH 1’

CH 1’ RX BPF CH 3’

CH 3

CH 3’

TX BPF

RX BPF

CH 1

CH 1’

Circulator

CH 3’

RX BPF

CH 1 TX BPF CH 3

SD (V)

B　 　 R　 　 U

Dummy Load

CH 1’

Circulator

Transduser

RX BPF

Transduser

CH 3’

MAIN (V)

ON

PROT SD RX

MAIN-1 SD RX

PROT RX

MAIN-1 RX

PROT TX

MAIN-1 TX

PROT SD RX

MAIN-1 SD RX

PROT RX

MAIN-1 RX

PROT TX

MAIN-1 TX

OFF POWER ON/OFF

TX F MON

SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Figure 4.14 - Set-up of Transmit Spectrum Measurement

4-24

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.6

Receiver (RX) AGC Range This test is to check the AGC range of MAIN RX and SD RX independently. This test should be carried out after the IF output level test, and for that reason the IF output test has been included.

4.5.6.1

4.5.6.2

Equipment Required •

0 to 80 dB RF attenuator and coaxial cables for RF and IF.

•

HP436A/HP8483A Power meter with sensor or equivalent

•

LCT

Test Procedure 1. Using LCT set the AGC to “ON” 2. Connect the power meter to the RX IF MAIN MON 3. Check (adjust if required) the IF level. (- 10 dBm ± 1 dB). 4. Connect the attenuator between the MAIN RF input and the MAIN RF output of BRU. 5. Adjust for the minimum attenuation. 6. Measure the RSL with the power meter. 7. Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the specified RSL (-76 dBm for 64 QAM and - 74 dBm for 128 QAM). 8. Confirm that the IF level remains within the limits (- 10 dBm ± 1 dB). 9. Connect the power meter to the RX IF PROT MON. 10. Check (adjust if required) the IF level. (- 10 dBm ± 1 dB). 11. Connect the attenuator between the MAIN RF input and the MAIN RF output of BRU. 12. Adjust for the minimum attenuation. 13. Measure the RSL with the power meter. 14. Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the specified RSL (-76 dBm for 64 QAM and - 74 dBm for 128 QAM). 15. Confirm that the IF level remains within the limits (- 10 dBm ± 1 dB). 16. Record the results in your Data Recording Forms. 17. Restore the connections.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-25

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

From Main Antenna

MAIN (V)

From SD Antenna

Transducer

B

R

RX BPF CH 3’

CH 3’

TX BPF

RX BPF

CH 1

CH 1’

Dummy Load

CH 1’

Circulator

CH 3

SD (V)

TX F MON

PROT SD RX

MAIN-1 SD RX

MAIN-1 RX

PROT TX

OFF POWER ON/OFF

MAIN-1 TX

MN IF OUT

ON

PROT RX

SD IF OUT

Variable Attenuator 0 ~ 80 dB

IF POWER METER MSTU Front View

Figure 4.15 - Set-up of AGC Range Measurement

4-26

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.7

Optical Output Power Level This test describes the Optional Characteristics tests for the SRT 1F radio equipment.

4.5.7.1

Equipment Required Optical Power Meter

4.5.7.2

Specification

4.5.7.3

S-1.1

L-1.1

L-1.2

–8~–15dBm

0~–5dBm

0~–5dBm

Test Procedure To measure the Optical Output Power of OPT INTF unit. Provisioning

IS (for all units) ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) OFF

1. Clean and inspect the optical connections. 2. Connect the optical power meter to the optical signal output of the OPT INTF unit through the SC optical fiber. 3. Verify that the optical output power complies with the specification. 4. Record the results. 5. Repeat for all OPT INTF units.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-27

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

Optical Power Meter [P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

-V IN

-V IN

STM-1 Optical Signal BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42 CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35

CN 31

CN 16

CN 21

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 68

CN 79

CN 77

OPT INTF Y

[M6 M6] M6

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

[M4 M4] M4

CN 67

CN 76

CN 78

[M3 M3] M3

CN 66

CN 74

CN 72

[M2 M2] M2

Optical cable Connector

CN 32

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

MSPSW 4

CN 73

CN 75

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF P BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 13

MSPSW 3

BBIU

MSPSW 2

-V IN

MSPSW 1

-V IN

CN 15

IN

CN 11

CN 12

OUT

SCSU

To/from Unit

[M7 M7] M7

Figure 4.16 - Optical Output Power Measurement

4-28

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.8

Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level This test is to measure the minimum (MIM) and maximum (MAX) optical receive levels of the SRT 1F radio.

4.5.8.1

Test Procedure To measure the receive levels: 1. Maintain the optical attenuator set-up. 2. Slowly increase the optical attenuation until the LINE LED glows. This indicates that the B2 MIN alarm threshold has been crossed. 3. Reduce the attenuation by 1 dB to remove the alarm.

Note:

The B2 alarm will not clear immediately, allow time for the alarm to clear before proceeding. 4. Remove the patchcord from the receiver and connect it into the optical power meter.

5. Use LCT to override the safety interlock. (Status/Control…Control Panel…ALS Release) 6. Click on the OK command button to fire the laser for 90 seconds. 7. Record the measurement in the Data Recording Forms.

Note:

The following steps are optional. They check that the maximum input level to the OPT INTF unit (according to the specification) does not overload the optical receiver. 8a. For OPT INTF–L11, decrease the attenuation until a –10 dBm is read on the power meter. (Approximately 8 dB attenuation.) 8b. For OPT INTF–S11, decrease the attenuation until a –8 dBm is read on the power meter. (Approximately 0 dB attenuation.) 8c. For OPT INTF–L12, decrease the attenuation until a –10 dBm is read on the power meter. (Approximately 8 dB attenuation.) 9. Disconnect the patchcord from the power meter and reconnect it to the receiver. 10. Verify that the B2 MIN alarm has cleared, and the PRBS is errorfree, indicating that the OPT INTF complies with the specification. 11. Record the results in the Data Recording Forms. 12. Adjust the optical attenuator to 15 dB. 13. Repeat the procedure from Step 2 for the remaining OPT INTF units.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-29

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 1

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7

-V IN

Variable Attenuator

Optical Power Meter

-V IN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

CN 42 CN 43

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

OCC INTF

CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35

CN 21

CN 23

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 68

CN 79

CN 77

OPT INTF Y

[M6 M6] M6

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

[M4 M4] M4

CN 67

CN 76

CN 78

[M3 M3] M3

CN 66

CN 74

CN 72

[M2 M2] M2

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

MSPSW 4

CN 73

Optical cable Connector

IN

CN 16

CN 14

Optical cable Connector

CN 32

OUT

CN 31

CN 75

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF P BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 13

MSPSW 3

BBIU

MSPSW 2

-V IN

MSPSW 1

-V IN

CN 15

IN

CN 11

CN 12

OUT

SCSU

To/from Unit

To/from Unit

[M7 M7] M7

OPT INTF X

OPT INTF Y

Figure 4.17 - Optical Receive Levels Test Set Up

4-30

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.9

External Clock Supply This test checks the SRT 1F radio external clock supply.

4.5.9.1

Warning Messages Refer to the warning messages detailed in par. 4.3.

4.5.9.2

Test Procedure For equipment configured for external or tributary timing only. To test the external clock: 1. Supply an external 2 MHz clock source compliant to ITU-T Recommendation to EXT CLK IN coaxial connector CN1 or CN2 located on SCSU BWB, feed a frequency counter with the same source. 2. Connect another frequency counter to the T0 CLK OUT MON coaxial connector CN 5 or CN 6 located on SCSU BWB, by using the clock monitor patchcord. 3. Does the second frequency counter read the same value shown by the first one?. If YES, STOP, proceed to Step 5. If NO, continue with Step 4. 4. Resolve the problem through local procedures by ensuring that the selected source of synchronisation is present and valid. 5. If external timing is used, disconnect the clock primary and secondary sources from the SRT 1F. Verify that an alarm appears on the local terminal (LCT).

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-31

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

PDU(OPTION) CN 12

CN 11

CN 10

CN 9

CN 8

CN 7

CN 6

CN 5

CN 4

CN 3

CN 2

CN 1

BRU

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

- V IN

MSTU 2

MSTU 3

MSTU 4

MSTU 5

MSTU 6

MSTU 7

MSTU 8

Counter

- V IN

MSTU 1

Frequency

- V IN

[P]

[M1 M1] M1

[M2 M2] M2

[M3 M3] M3

[M4 M4] M4

[M5 M5] M5

[M6 M6] M6

[M7 M7] M7 -V IN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

CN 40 CN 41

SV

HK 2

HK 1

CN 4

TCU Y

TCU X

CN 2

ECU 2

CN 5

CN 42 CN 43 CN 44

OCC INTF

CN 3

ECU 1

Detail

CN 1

-V IN

CN 45 CN 33 CN 34

CN 6

CN 35

SCSU

CN 11

CN 11

CN 16

CN 21

CN 31

CN 23

CN 14

CN 17

CN 22

CN 24

CN 68

CN 77

[M6 M6] M6

BB INTF Y

[M5 M5] M5

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

CN 67

CN 79

[M4 M4] M4

BB INTF Y

CN 76

CN 78

[M3 M3] M3

CN 66

CN 74

CN 72

[M2 M2] M2

CN 32

CN 65

MSPSW 7

MSPSW6

MSPSW 5

MSPSW 4

CN 73

CN 75

BB INTF X

BB INTF Y

BB INTF X

BB INTF P BBC

[M1 M1] M1

CN 15

CN 13

MSPSW 3

BBIU

MSPSW 2

-V IN

MSPSW 1

-V IN

CN 12

[M7 M7] M7

Figure 4.18 - External Clock Frequency Measurement

4-32

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.5.10

Rack Alarm Test This test checks the rack alarms.

4.5.10.1

Equipment Required •

4.5.10.2

Multi Meter

Test procedure Generate warning, minor, major and critical alarms. Confirm contact closure with the multi-meter (relevant pin connected to ground). Apply closure to the alarm ACO input and confirm the ACO activation.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

Radio Equipment Rack Alarm BUS Output

+Vcc

+Vcc

L

NE ALM-N

L

NE ALM-C

L

VIS CR

L

AUD CR

L

VIS MJ

L

AUD MJ

L

VIS MN

L

AUD MN

L

VIS WN

L

AUD WN

L

RAB -MNT COMMON

R

L

ACO IN Photo Coupler Primary

CN 31 on SCSU BWB

Figure 4.19 - Rack Alarm Bus Test Set-Up

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-33

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Table 4.4 - Rack Alarm Bus Pinouts Interface Logic Name

Description

Alarm

Power down

CLOSE

OPEN

NE ALM-N

NE Alarm (N)

NE ALM-C

NE Alarm (C)

VIS CR

Visible Critical alarm

CLOSE

CLOSE

AUD CR

Audible Critical alarm

CLOSE

OPEN

VIS MJ

Visible Major alarm

CLOSE

OPEN

AUD MJ

Audible Major alarm

CLOSE

OPEN

VIS MN

Visible Minor alarm

CLOSE

OPEN

AUD MN

Audible Minor alarm

CLOSE

OPEN

VIS WN

Visible Warning

CLOSE

OPEN

AUD WN

Audible Warning

CLOSE

OPEN

RAB-MNT

Maintenance

CLOSE

OPEN

ACO IN

Alarm Cut Off In

*ACO IN

ACO Ground

Cut off = CLOSE

NE ALM = (CR) OR (MJ) OR (MN) OR (WR) Interface Specification INPUT

I = 0.3mA to 11.3mA I max = 100mA

OUTPUT

V max = 110V (DC)

Table 4.5 – Rack Alarm Bus Pinouts PIN No.

4-34

Description

Remarks

PIN No.

Description

8

COMMON

Remarks

15

*ACO IN

ACO Ground line

7

VIS MN

Visible Miner alarm

14

ACO IN

Alarm Cut Off IN

6

AUD MN

Audible Miner alarm

13

NE ALM-N

NE alarm (N)

5

VIS MJ

Visible Major alarm

12

NE ALM-C

NE alarm ©

4

AUD MJ

Audible Major alarm

11

RAB-MNT

Maintenance

3

VIS CR

Visible Critical alarm

10

VIS WR

Visible Warning

2

AUD CR

Audible Critical alarm

9

AUD WR

Audible Warning

1

FG

Frame Ground

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.6

SRT 1F Inter-Station Tests This chapter details the procedures to be carried out after In-Station tests have been completed and the SRT 1F has been connected to the network.

ATTENTION DO NOT attempt to re-tune any adjustment point, if the test result complies with the specification.

4.6.1

Receive (RX) Signal Level This test is meant to confirm the result of antenna alignment by measuring the RF receiving level at the input of MSTU.

4.6.1.1

4.6.1.2

Equipment Required •

LCT

•

RF Power Meter

Test Procedure 1. Confirm the TX site state (High or Normal power). 2. Remove MN and SD RF connection between the branching network and RX. 3. Connect the Power meter to the RX branching network main output. 4. Compare the result with the path calculations. Results should be within ± 1.5 dB approximately. 5. Compare the result with the value shown by LCT (Menu DISPLAY CURRENT LEVEL) 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for SD. 7. Repeat for other bearer/s (PROT, M1 etc.)

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group. Please note that LCT accuracy is ± 3 dB with the received field in the range between –35 and –65 dB.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-35

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.6.2

UMN

IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE Instruments: Link Analyser, adapters, IF & RF cables, fixed & variable attenuators. Proceeding: Connect the Tx Link Analyser to “70M IN” of MSTU in the remote station and the Rx Link Analyser to “XPIC OUT” of MSTU in the nearend station as show in Figure 4.20, set as follow Link TX Settings Baseband Frequency

250KHz

Deviation

250KHz

Sweep width

±12.0 MHz

IF Frequency

70.00 MHz

IF Level

–10.0 dBm

Change the status of Rx equipment from “In service” to “Maintenance” by LCT. •

Choose Status/Control Þ Change Maintenance State and select the MSTU. The Change Maintenance State dialog box appears.

•

Select RSPI and the action Maintenance and click OK.

If Space Diversity system is applied, this test should be done for MAIN receiver and SD receiver independently. MAIN RX 1. Remove the SD RX RF cable.

4-36

2.

In the received side set the ITEM No. rotary switch to “B” position.

3.

Set the Frequency Measurement of Rx side by FLEXR. Choose State/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ Radio Physical Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears.

4.

Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement and click OK.

5.

The amplitude response and the group delay curve are displayed on RX link analyser.

6.

If the RX link analyser is not locked, confirm that the XPIC OUT level is whitin the limit (–10dBm±1dB). If the output level is not comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT.

7.

In absence of fading and reflections, check that the amplitude response and the group delay of the main receiver are within the limits.

8.

If the amplitude response does not comply with the limits, use the INCR/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the amplitude is whitin the limits. Performed this operation with ITEM No. rotary switch in the “B” position. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 9.

If the group delay response does not comply with the limits, use the INC/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the amplitude is whitin the limits. Performed this operation with ITEM No. rotary switch in the following position: •

ITEM No.2 : DELAY-HIGH (for adjustment of higher frequency)

•

ITEM No.3 : DELAY-MIDDLE (for adjustment of middle frequency)

•

ITEM No.4 : DELAY-LOW (for adjustment of low frequency)

10. To memorizing the new value set the ITEM No. rotary switch in “9” position and push the INCR/DECR buttons simultaneosly. After that, reset the ITEM No. rotary switch to “0”. 11. Connect the SD RX RF cable. 12. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and Release the Frequency Measurement. 13. Change the status of Rx equipment from service by LCT.

Maintenance

to In

SD RX 14. Remove the MN RX RF cable. 15. In the received side set the ITEM No. rotary switch to “B” position. 16. Set the Frequency Measurement of Rx side by LCT. Choose State/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ Radio Physical Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears. 17. Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement and click OK. 18. The amplitude response and the group delay curve are displeyed on RX link analyser. 19. If the RX link analyser is not locked, confirm that the XPIC OUT level is whitin the limit (–10dBm±1dB). If the output level is not comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT. 20. In absence of fading and reflections, check that the amplitude response and the group delay of the diversity receiver are within the limits. 21. If the amplitude response does not comply with the limits, adjust it by LCT. •

Choose Status/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ RSPI adjustment.

•

Click a selectable unit, then click anywhere else on the shelf. The RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears

•

Select the Adjustment Item SDSLOPE to modify the IF response.

•

Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK.

22. If the group delay response does not comply with the limits, use the INC/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-37

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

amplitude is whitin the limits. Performed this operation with ITEM No. rotary switch in the following position: •

ITEM No.2 : DELAY-HIGH (for adjustment of higher frequency)

•

ITEM No.3 : DELAY-MIDDLE (for adjustment of middle frequency)

•

ITEM No.4 : DELAY-LOW (for adjustment of low frequency)

23. To memorizing the new value set the ITEM No. rotary switch in “9” position and push the INCR/DECR buttons simultaneosly. After that, reset the ITEM No. rotary switch to “0”. 24. Connect the MN RX RF cable. 25. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and Release the Frequency Measurement. 26. Change the status of Rx equipment from Maintenance to In service by LCT. NOTE: In the 128 QAM system, the IF adaptive equaliser D-EQL is used according to the BRU system. Please refers to the following table:

4-38

CH arrangement

Adjacent Channel

D-EQL code

Interleaved

None

CT DLEQ-1161-SOSHIN

Co-Channel

One adjacent Upper

CT DLEQ-1235-SOSHIN

Co-Channel

Two adjacent

CT DLEQ-1234-SOSHIN

Co-Channel

One adjacent Lower

CT DLEQ-1236-SOSHIN

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

RX SIDE

TX SIDE

IF IN MAIN IF MON ON OFF POWER ON/OFF

Microwave Link Analyzer (Transmitter)

ON

SD IF MON

OFF

DADE setting for SD

POWER ON/OFF

IF Adp. Equal. D-EQL TX F MON

XPIC OUT

Microwave Link Analyzer (Receiver)

TX F MON

INCR DECR

ITEM No. ROTARY SW

Figure 4.20 Test bench for IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-39

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.6.3

UMN

SPACE DIVERSITY EQUALIZATION Instruments: Link Analyser, Spectrum Analyser, adapters, IF & RF cables, fixed & variable attenuators. Proceeding: 1. Connect the Tx Link Analyser to “70M IN” of MSTU in the remote station and the Rx Link Analyser to “XPIC OUT” of MSTU in the nearend station, set as follow: Link TX Settings Baseband Frequency

250KHz

Deviation

250KHz

Sweep width

±2.0 MHz

IF Frequency

70.00 MHz

IF Level

–10.0 dBm

2. Select ATPC transmitter’s function as ATPC function OFF and transmitting to maximum level (ATPC HIGH). 3. Change the status of Rx equipment from “In service” to “Maintenance” by LCT. •

Choose Status/Control Þ Change Maintenance State and select the MSTU. The Change Maintenance State dialog box appears (Figure 4.21).

•

Select RSPI and the action Maintenance and click OK.

Figure 4.21 Change Maintenance State dialog box

4-40

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4. Set the Frequency Measurement in the Rx equipment by LCT. •

Choose State/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ Radio Physical Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears (Figure 4.22).

•

Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement and click OK.

Figure 4.22 - Radio Physical Interface dialog box 5. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch in position “B” in the Rx station. 6. Confirm that the following output level is whitin the limit: •

XPIC OUT –10dBm±1db

7. If the output level is not comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT. •

Choose Status/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ RSPI adjustment.

•

Select the Adjustment Item RX IF GAIN to modify the XPIC OUT.

•

Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK.

8. Set the “SD DADE ON ” and “EPS OFF” by LCT in Rx station.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

•

Choose State/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ Maintenance for SD. Select the MSTU unit and the Maintenance for SD dialog box appears (Figure 4.23).

•

Select the Action Operate and the Item SD DADE ON and click OK.

•

Select the Action Operate and the Item EPS OFF and click OK

4-41

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Figure 4.23 - Maintenance for SD dialog box 9. To display the two tracks on the Rx link analyser turn the ITEM No. rotary switch in position “0” and after than in position “B” again. The difference between the 2 tracks of group delay visualised represents delay T between Main and diversity’s received signals (due to waveguide path difference). 10. Confirm that the delay difference displayed on the Microwave Link Analyzer is less than 2 ns. If the delay difference is not less than 2 ns, change the delay line for IF DADE so as to achieve the difference of 2 ns. The green jumpers are used to introduce the delay on Diversity way. The green jumpers in default position (vertical) does not introduced delay, put it in horizontal position to introduce the delay. Please refer to following picture (Figure 4.24):

Figure 4.24

4-42

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 11. Enter in the Maintenance for SD dialog box by LCT and select the Action Release and the Item SD DADE ON and click OK. In the same dialog box select the Action Release and the Item EPS OFF and click OK Finally to complete equalisation, a compensation of the signal amplitude entering the combiner has to be done as reported. 1. Remove the SD RX RF input cable. 2. Confirm that the following output levels are within the limits: •

MN 70M OUT

–10dBm±1dB

•

XPIC OUT

–10dBm±1dB

3. If the output levels are not comply with the tolerances adjust the levels by LCT. •

Choose Status/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ RSPI adjustment. Select the MSTU unit and the RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears (Figure 4.25).

Figure 4.25 Radio Physical Interface dialog box

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

•

Select the Adjustment Item RX RF GAIN to modify the MN 70M OUT.

•

Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK.

•

Select the Adjustment Item RX IF GAIN to modify the XPIC OUT.

•

Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK.

4-43

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

4. Replace the SD RX RF input cable and remove the MAIN RX RF input cable. 5. Confirm that the following output levels are within the limits: •

SD 70M OUT

•

XPIC OUT –10dBm±1dB

–10dBm±1dB

6. If the output levels are not comply with the tolerances adjust the levels by LCT. •

Choose Status/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ RSPI adjustment.

•

Click a selectable unit, then click anywhere else on the shelf. The RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears.

•

Select the Adjustment Item RX RF GAIN to modify the SD 70M OUT.

•

Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required.

•

Select the Adjustment Item SD GAIN to modify the XPIC OUT.

•

Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required

7. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch in position “0”in the Rx station. 8. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and Release the Frequency Measurement. 9. Change the status of Rx equipment from Maintenance to In service by LCT. 10. Replace the MAIN RX RF input cable. Repeate the same procedure for all MSTU units equipped. Note: In the SRT1F equipment it is possible to compensate a static delay between Main and Diversity antenna only to inserted a delay on diversity way. The max delay compensable is 120nsec.

4-44

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.6.4

ATPC Test (End to End LAB Test) This test is meant to measure the ATPC. (End to End Lab Test)

4.6.4.1

4.6.4.2

Equipment Required •

Variable RF attenuator

•

LCT

Test Procedure 1. Remove RF IN, MAIN and SD cables. 2. Insert the variable attenuator between the MAIN RF OUT of the branching network and MAIN RF input of the RX. 3. Adjust for minimum attenuation. 4. Check on LCT for the TX power level at the remote site by: Status/control Þ Shelf condition Þ Select TX, M1 / PROT 5. Increase the attenuation for RSL ≤ ATPC activation point from the NORMAL POWER to the HIGH POWER (–40, –50 or –60 dBm selectable) 6. Repeat step 4 and check for HIGH POWER 7. Remove the attenuator and wait for ATPC restore time from the HIGH POWER to the NORMAL POWER (1, 4, or 15 mins). The NORMAL POWER is dynamic varying the level due to the propagation loss. 8. Repeat step 4 and check for no alarm (normal) 9. Restore connections.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-45

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

MAIN ANTENNA

SD ANTENNA

Transducer

RX BPF

CH 1’

Dummy Load

PROT SD RX

CH 3’ MAIN-1 RX

CH 3’

RX BPF

CH 1 TX BPF CH 3 PROT TX

OFF

MAIN-1 TX

ON

POWER ON/OFF

R

CH 1’

B Circulator

SD (V)

MAIN-1 SD RX

MAIN (V)

PROT RX

Remote Station Transmitter

Variable Attenuator 0 ~ 80 dB

TX F MON

Figure 4.26 - ATPC Test Set-Up

4-46

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.7

SRT 1F End to End Station Performance Tests This chapter provides instructions for end to end station testing of the SRT 1F radio.

4.7.1 4.7.1.1

Remote NE Management via DCC DCC configuration Note : The following settings have to be applied to both Local and Remote NE •

Connect to the NE using LCT. To enable DCC choose Provisioning Þ Facility Þ Set Base Band Interface Þ Set OHB, the dialog box reported in Figure 4.27 appears.

Figure 4.27

•

Select Action Edit, STM1RS, J0 Byte = N, E1 Byte = Y, D1-D3 Byte = Y, B1 Byte = Y then click OK.

•

Select Provisioning Þ Section DCC Þ SDCC SS, the dialog box in Figure 4.28 appears.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-47

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Figure 4.28 •

Select Action Edit, Access ID = GP1-W1-R-RS, Service State = In Service then click OK, when prompted to select Action Initialize click Cancel.

•

Repeat the last command choosing GP1-W1-L-RS as Access ID

•

In the same dialog box choose Action Initialize then click OK

•

Now LAPD parameters have to be set choose Provisioning Þ Section DCC Þ LAPD Parameters. The dialog box in Figure 4.29 is shown.

Figure 4.29

4-48

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP •

Select Access ID = GP1-W1-R-RS, leave as default all the other parameters, or for the LAPD Cmd/Rsp only choose the correct setting according to Table 1 then click OK, when prompted to select Action Initialize click Cancel.

•

Repeat the last command choosing GP1-W1-L-RS as Access ID

•

In the same dialog box choose Action Initialize then click OK Table 4.6 - Presettings Local NE

Remote NE

PLUS-R (*)

PLUS-R (*)

PLUS-C

PLUS-C

USER (**)

NETWORK (**)

* Default Setting ** Use USER/NETWORK only for interworking with other vendor Note: The Initialize command can take up to 2-3 minutes, please wait until command completion.

4.7.1.2

Test •

Perform all the tests reported in the list below and mark the appropriate box in the Test Report .

1. Login to the Local NE 2. Login to the Remote NE

Note: In order to Login to the Remote NE, its NE ID must be added in the “access list”, after the login command and after the serial port parameters acceptance, the dialog box reported in Figure 4.30 is shown.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-49

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Figure 4.30 Type the NE Id in the Enter NE ID field then click Add NE ID, enter username and password then click OK.

4-50

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.7.2

Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test To check the operation of the Radio Protection Switch function.

4.7.2.1

4.7.2.2

Equipment Required •

LCT

•

MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent

•

Patch cords, attenuators and cables.

Test Procedure 1. Remove MAIN and SD RX, RF input cable. 2. Insert variable attenuator between MAIN RX, RF INPUT and RF OUTPUT of RX BPF of BRU. 3. Configure test equipment as per Figure 4.31 4. Confirm error (5 minute test).

free

transmission

prior

to

start

testing

5. Increase the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via LCT that a radio protection switch by USW has occurred. Note: Confirm that the switch occurs at the threshold set by LCT 6. Confirm that the SDH analyzer is error free. 7. Decrease the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via LCT that a radio protection switch has restored. 8. Confirm that the SDH analyzer is error free. 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 for the other MAIN channels (if fitted). 10. Via LCT, perform a manual switch of USW for MAIN 1. 11. Confirm that the SDH analyzer is error free. 12. Release the manual switch. 13. Confirm switch reversion and error free. 14. Repeat steps 10 to 14 for all main bearers (if fitted) Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-51

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

STM-1(CMI) OUT STM-1(CMI) IN SV

ECU 2

ECU 1

SDH Analyzer

OCC INTF

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

WS

SCSU BSW unit

Figure 4.31 - Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test Set-Up (in case of STM-1 CMI electric signal)

4-52

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.7.3

Way Side Test This section covers the test procedures for the Way Side function. These tests are:

4.7.3.1

4.7.3.2

•

Way Side Transmission Test

•

Way Side Characteristics Test

Equipment Required •

RF variable attenuator

•

Error ratio test set for 2 Mbit/s

•

MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent

Way Side Transmission Test

Provisioning

IS (In Service) for all units WS Enable (WS1, WS2) for PROT and M1 NE Clock M1 Line sync

1. Input the 2.048 Mbit/s signal to the 75 Ω port of the BSW unit, and confirm that there is no error at the receiving side. This test shall be carried out on both CH of WS1 and WS2. 2. In the same way, confirm 120 Ω input/output port is error free.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-53

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

SDH Analyzer BSW 7

BSW 6

BSW 5

BSW 4

BSW 3

BSW 2

BSW 1

STM-1(CMI) OUT STM-1(CMI) IN SV

ECU 2

ECU 1 OCC INTF

HK 2

HK 1

TCU Y

TCU X

WS(SOH) IN

WS:2.048 Mb/s OUT

WS(SOH) OUT

WS:2.048 Mb/s IN

WS(RFCOH) IN

SCSU

PCM Analyzer

WS(RFCOH) OUT

BSW unit

Figure 4.32 - Way Side Transmission Test Set-Up (In case that line impedance is 75 Ω.)

4-54

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.7.4

BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test) This BER Characteristic is a lab test.

4.7.4.1

4.7.4.2

Equipment Required •

MP1550A SDH analyzer or equivalent.

•

Variable RF attenuator

Specification Up fade

BER=10-3 or better (at RSL = –17dBm)

Down fade

See Figure 4.34

Test Procedure Provisioning

IS (In Service) for all units

1. Calibrate the RF variable attenuator vs. receiving level. 2. Measure the BER payload (VC4), and confirm that the BER characteristics meet the required specification.

Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-55

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Variable Attenuator

STM-1

STM-1

ANALYZER

ANALYZER

STM-1(CMI) OUT

STM-1(CMI) IN

STM-1(CMI) IN

STM-1(CMI) OUT

SDH Analyzer

SDH Analyzer

PROT

M-1

M-2

BSW unit

SCSU

PROT

M-1

M-2

BSW unit

SCSU

Figure 4.33 - BER Test Set-Up

4-56

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Figure 4.34 shows the Down Fade BER Characteristics

BER = 10 - 3 at RSL = - 74.5 dBm 10

-3

10 -

4

10 -

5

10 -

6

BER

Guaranteed Curve

BER = 10 - 6 at RSL = - 70.5 dBm Typical Curve - 78

- 76

- 74

- 72

- 70

- 68 dBm

Receive Signal Level (a) Down Fade BER Characteristics of 64 QAM system

BER = 10

BER

10 -

3

10 -

4

10 -

5

-3

at RSL = - 72 dBm

Guaranteed Curve BER = 10 - 6 at RSL = - 68 dBm

10 -

6

Typical Curve - 76

- 74

- 72

- 70

- 68

- 66 dBm

Receive Signal Level (b) Down Fade BER Characteristics of 128 QAM system

Figure 4.34 - Down Fade BER Characteristics

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-57

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.7.5

UMN

BACKGROUND BER TEST Instruments: SDH Data Transmission Analyser with S1 byte facility, BB cables Procedure: Connect the DTA to the SRT-1F in a station, inserting a BaseBand signal loop in remote station, select a STM-1 signal (with VC-4 unframed 140 M/s payload) select correct synch source and let the system recording for 12 hours (or different depending on Customer requirements). In case of problem during recording test, identify the affected direction using another DTA and through other tests identify responsible unit, replace it and repeat the test. Caution: The radio equipment should be synchronizes before to perform this test. To synchronize the hop perform the following step: •

In the local station connect the DTA to the radio and set the byte S1 to 0010 (G.811)

•

In the local station by LCT choose Provisioning Þ Set Synchronization Þ Set Sync Mode and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.35).

•

Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 and click OK

Figure 4.35 Set Sync Mode dialog box

4-58

•

Choose Provisioning Þ Set Synchronization Þ Set Sync Parameter and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.36).

•

Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU and EC Priority 1 = GP1-W1-L (STM1 channel1) and click OK.

•

In the same dialog box select the action Retrieve and click OK to control if the Radio is sync. with STM1.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

Figure 4.36 Set Sync Parameter dialog box •

In the remote station by LCT choose Provisioning Þ Set Synchronization Þ Set Sync Mode Figure 4.35 appear.

•

Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 and click OK.

•

Choose Provisioning Þ Set Synchronization Þ Set Sync Parameter and the Figure 4.36 appears.

•

Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU and EC Priority 1 = GP1-W1-R (DEM channel 1) and click OK.

•

In the same dialog box select the action Retrieve and click OK to control if the Radio is sync. with DEM 1.

Caution: The above parameter is used only to perform the Background BER test. Every in service equipment should be configured according to the sync. planning.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-59

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.7.6 4.7.6.1

UMN

Synchronization Clock Sources selection •

Connect to the NE using LCT. Choose Provisioning Þ System Þ Set Synchronization Þ Set Sync Mode, the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.37).

•

Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 then click OK

Figure 4.37 •

4-60

Choose Provisioning Þ System Þ Set Synchronization Þ Set Sync Parameter and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.38).

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

Figure 4.38 •

Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU , EC Priority 1 = GP1-W1-L (STM1 channel1), EC Priority 2 = CLKHZ-X (External input), EC Priority 3 = GP1-W1-R (Radio Bearer 1)

•

Set the External Source quality to 2 (G.811) in the Ext 2MHz-X field

•

Set the EC Threshold field to 5 (Internal Clock quality) then click OK.

•

Connect the SDH Signal Analyzer to the radio (BSW Port) and set the byte S1 to 0010 (G.811)

•

Connect the 2 MHz clock Source to the external clock input

•

Verify all the setting choosing the Action Retrieve in the same window.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-61

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.7.6.2

UMN

Test •

Perform all the tests reported in the list below and mark the appropriate box in the Test Report.

Note: In order to verify the correct execution of the test reported below, always check the result using the Retrieve action in the dialog box reported in Figure 4.39. 1. Verify that NE is locked to EC1 2. Disconnect EC1, verify that NE is locked to EC2 3. Re-connect EC1, verify that NE is locked to EC1 4. Disconnect EC1 and EC2, verify that NE is locked to EC3 5. Re-connect EC2, verify that NE is locked to EC2 6. Disconnect EC2 and EC3, verify that NE enter HOLDOVER mode 7. Re-connect ECx, verify that NE is locked to ECx (where x=1,2,3) 8. Switch to FREERUNNING mode Note: In order to switch to FREERUNNING mode choose Status/Control Þ Protection Switch Þ Operate Sync Switch, in the dialog box shown (Figure 4.40) select Action Operate, Timing Control Type EC and Switch to INT then click OK.

Figure 4.39

4-62

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.7.7

MSP Switching Test This test is to confirm the MSP switching operation. This test is applicable for terminal equipment of OPT INTF with line protection.

4.7.7.1

Test Procedure

Service State In service (for all units) Provisioning: 1. On the set up shown in Figure 4.40, set the optical “variable Attenuator” to the normal condition. 2. On the SRT 1F A equipment, select the X-side of the OPT INTF. 3. Interrupt the optical input signal by increasing the value of the “Variable attenuator’, and confirm that the change over from X-side to Y-side is automatically operated by the MSP function. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for Y-side to X-side change over. 5. On the SRT 1F B equipment, select the X-side of the OPT INTF. 6. Remove the X-side OPT INTF unit, and confirm that the STM-1 signal has automatically changed over from the X-side to the Y-side by the MSP function. 7. Repeat steps 6 to 7 for Y-side to X-side changeover. Note:

Report any problems to the installation group.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-63

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Test Set Up SRT 1F A

OPT INTF(Y)

OPT INTF(X)

OPT INTF(Y)

OPT INTF(X)

SRT 1F B

Variable Attenuator PATTERN

PATTERN GENERATOR

GENERATOR System X

System Y

System X

System Y

Figure 4.40 - MSP Switching Function Test

4-64

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.8 4.8.1

Appendix MSTU Setting MSTUs (Main Signal Transmit Units) are set and tuned at the factory and commissioning test are executed to assure the system performance. There is no need to change settings or to re-adjust the MSTU controls. Siemens strongly recommends not to attempt to change or re-adjust settings unless the error performance has degraded seriously due to equipment deterioration. The following information is provided for a very skilled technical staff who might have to change or re-adjust settings in some special circumstances. Warning ;

Do not attempt to change or re-adjust settings of MSTU unless strictly necessary. If necessary, use the LCT as the first priority. In case of single antenna reception remove all straps of “DADE” (8) J1 to J32.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

(without

SD),

4-65

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.1.1

UMN

MSTU Front Panel

FAN (1)

FAN PWR (2) ON

POWER ON/OFF (3)

70M IN

(5)

REF I/O

(6)

MN 70M OUT (7) SD

OFF

DADE

(8)

D-EQL (9) TX F MON (4) XPIC OUT (10) XPIC IN INCR DECR ITEM No.

(11) Factory use only. ITEM No. must be “ 0 “ for normal operation. (12)

UNIT/RCI (13) LINE

Figure 4.41 - Front Panel of MSTU unit

4-66

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Figure 4.41 shows the front panel of the MSTU unit. Table 4.7 shows the functions of the MSTU front panel Table 4.7 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel

No.

Item

Function

(1)

FAN

Cooling 4 fans for transmitter.

(2)

FAN PWR

Power cable connector for cooling fans

(3)

POWER ON/OFF

DC power supply switch for MSTU unit

(4)

TX LO MON

Monitor terminal for TX local frequency

(5)

70M IN

70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement

(6)

REF I/O

In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.

(7)

70M OUT MN 70M OUT SD

70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD antenna reception

(8)

DADE

DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference See Figure 4.42 and Table 4.9 for setting. Remove all straps in case of single antenna reception (without SD).

(9)

D-EQL

Delay equalizer for branching network

(10)

XPIC OUT (master)

XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal

(11)

XPIC IN (slave)

XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation

(12)

INCR DECR ITEM No.

Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only) Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance See the next page for details. To memorize the setting, select ITEM No. = 9, then press INCR/DECR switches together.

(13)

LED indicator

Alarm/status indicator :

UNIT/RCI LINE

Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on * : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-67

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Table 4.8 shows the relationship between the position of rotary switch and functions of “Analog Level Setting” (12). Table 4.8 - Function of Rotary Switch (12) No.

Item

Function

0

Normal operation

The position for normal operation, in service state. INCR and DECR push switches are invalid.

1

DADE for XPIC

Compensates DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) between Vertical and Horizontal polarization in case of cochannel operation.

2

DELAY-H

Adjusts IF-IF group delay, high frequency component.

3

DELAY-M

Adjusts IF-IF group delay, medium frequency component

4

DELAY-L

Adjusts IF-IF group delay, low frequency component

5

ALC LVL

♣

Sets TX output level at ALC AUTO (ON)

6

ALC GAIN

♣

Sets TX output level at ALC MNL (OFF)

7

SD GAIN

♣

Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF to compensate the loss of DADE line.

8

SD SLOPE

♣

Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF to compensate the slope of DADE line.

9

RRF GAIN

♣

Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF

A

RIF GAIN

♣

Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF

B

R SLOPE

♦

Compensates the slope of Main line.

C

T SLOPE

♦

Compensates the slope of TX.

D E

Normal operation

The position for normal operation, in service state.

F

FAN replacement

For FAN replacement, inhibits FAN alarm and switches TX output to LOW level.

Note

♣

Use the LCT for setting.

♦

Do not attempt to re-adjust.

To memorize the setting, select ITEM No. = 9, then press INCR/DECR switches together.

4-68

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.1.2

DADE setting for SD The difference of waveguide length between Main and SD antenna shall be compensated by DADE (8). no use J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

-

2 ns

-

4 ns

-

4 ns

-

10 ns

-

10 ns

-

20 ns

-

30 ns

-

40 ns

Figure 4.42 - Strap pin for SD DADE Adjustment

See Table 4.9 for example of SD DADE setting.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-69

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

UMN

Table 4.9 - DADE setting for SD Strap position vs Delay difference between Main and SD antenna 0 ns

2 ns 4 ns 4 ns 10 ns 10 ns 20 ns 30 ns 40 ns

J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

2 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

4 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

10 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

18 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

36 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

110 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31

J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32

0 ns : Keep all straps as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on. 2 ns : Strap J1 to J2, J3 to J4, but keep others as default, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on. 4 ns : Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on. 10 ns : Strap J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J7, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on. 14 ns : Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4 and so on.

Attention : In case of single antenna reception (without SD), remove all straps J1 to J32.

4-70

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.8.2

Hardware Setting Most of system settings on the SRT 1F equipment are set through the LCT terminal. However, some part of system setting shall be carried out with hardware switches. These settings are completed at the factory test according to the system data and standard value. If needing to change these parameters, follow this instruction. Table 4.10 - Hardware Setting Position

Unit

Item

Switch

Setting

Default

SV unit

OSSI type

SWA1

X.25

default

NE Back to Back TCU

EXT 2M CLK (Y) input

SW81

Balance

default

Unbalance EXT 2M CLK (X) input

SW82

Balance

default

Unbalance

BSW

EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern

SW71, 72

EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern

SW73, 74

T0, T4 CLK output pattern

SW75

Power supply switch

CN64 (T4)

Bipolar (Hz)

CN65 (T0)

Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

default

SW2B

Balance

default

CMI input

Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

default

Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

default

Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

default

Unbalance WS input for 75 ohms

WS output

WS input

OCC INTF

CMI input

PE INTF

CMI input

SW25 (RFCOH)

Balance

SW28 (SOH)

Unbalance

SW75 (RFCOH)

75 ohms unbalance

SW77 (SOH)

120 ohms balance

SW24 (RFCOH)

75 ohms

SW27 (SOH)

120 ohms balance

SW29

Balance

default

default

default

default

Unbalance SW71

Balance

default

Unbalance

Figure 4.43 to Figure 4.47 show the position of switches.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-71

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.1

UMN

SV unit

Item

Switch

Setting

Position

OSSI type

SWA1

X.25

OPEN

NE Back to Back

CLOSE

SV

SWA1

X25/BTB

CLOSE ⇔ OPEN OPEN = X. 25 (default) CLOSE = NE Back to Back Factory setting only

X25/BTB Figure 4.43 - SWA1 on SV unit front panel

4-72

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.2

TCU unit Item

Switch

Setting

Position

EXT 2M CLK (Y) input

SW81

Balance

BAL

Unbalance

UNBAL

Balance

BAL

Unbalance

UNBAL

Bipolar (Hz)

BIP

Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

RZ

Bipolar (Hz)

BIP

Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

RZ

Bipolar (Hz)

BIP

Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

RZ

EXT 2M CLK (X) input

SW82

EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern

SW71, 72

EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern

SW73, 74

T0, T4 CLK output pattern

SW75

Power supply

CN64 (T4)

Bipolar (Hz)

BIP

CN65 (T0)

Return to Zero (Bit/sec)

RZ

T4 = non jitter FREE CN96

T0 = jitter FREE

▲ TOP CN65 CN64 CN92

SW75 SW74 SW73

TCU unit

SW71 to 75

SW72

SW82

SW71

SW81

SW81, 82

CN64, 65

BIP RZ BIP (default)

BAL UNBAL (default)

RZ (default)

Figure 4.44 - TCU Setting SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-73

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.3

UMN

BSW unit Item

Switch

Setting

Position

CMI input

SW2B

Balance

BAL

Unbalance

UNBAL

WS input for 75 ohms

SW25 (RFCOH)

Balance

BAL

SW28 (SOH)

Unbalance

UNBAL

WS output

SW75 (RFCOH)

75 ohms unbalance

75

SW77 (SOH)

120 ohms balance

120

SW24 (RFCOH)

75 ohms

75

SW27 (SOH)

120 ohms balance

120

WS input

▲ TOP CN96

SW2B

SW28 SW77 SW27

SW25 SW75 CN92

SW24

BSW unit SW24, 27 75 (default) 120

SW2B, 25, 28

SW75, 77

BAL (default) UNBAL 75 120 (default)

Figure 4.45 - BSW Setting

4-74

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.4

OCC INTF unit

Item

Switch

Setting

Position

CMI input

SW29

Balance

BAL

Unbalance

UNBAL

▲ TOP

CN92

CN96

SW29

OCC INTF unit

SW29 UNBAL BAL (default)

Figure 4.46 – OCC INTF setting

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-75

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.5

UMN

PE INTF unit Item

Switch

Setting

Position

CMI input

SW71

Balance

BAL

Unbalance

UNBAL CN3H

▲ TOP SW71

CN8H CNAH

PE INTF unit

SW71 BAL (default)

UNBAL

Figure 4.47 - PE INTF Setting

4-76

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.8.3

Provisioning through LCT Most part of system setting is carried out through the LCT (Local Terminal).

No.

LCT Command

4

Unit

Functions

Provisioning

4.1

Service State

Changes Primary service state IS (In Service) and OOS (Out of Service) Enter = Changes from OOS to IS Delete = Changes from IS to OOS Retrieve = Displays current service state

4.1.1

Change EQPT State

BBIU

Service state of BB INTF unit

4.1.2

Change Facility State

BBIU

Service state of STM1RS facility

4.1.3

Change RPS State

All

Service state of Radio Protection System

a

Group 1

All

Service state of RPS Group 1

b

Group 2

All

Service state of RPS Group 2

4.2

Facility

4.2.1

Set Baseband Interface

All

a

Set OHB

BBIU

Usage of RSOH and MSOH STM1RS = J0, E1, D1 to D3, B1 (MSTU) STM1MS = MS AIS, MS FERF, E2, D4 to D12 SSBIT, B2, K1K2, Z1,Z2

b

Set Facility Threshold

BBIU

Threshold level of error performance STM1RS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS STM1MS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, AU4 = PJS

c

Set Facility Group

BBIU

Excessive Error initiator Signal Fail/Signal Degrade Signal Degrade Threshold = 1E-5 to 1E-9

d

Set Alarm Attribute

4.2.1d MSTU

Set Alarm Attribute

Alarm severity and SA/NSA of following items MSTU

EQPT = CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, FAN-FAIL, XPIC-OFF, DEM-FLR, MOD-FLR, ACTCW, RX-FLR, ACTEPSOFF, ACTSDDADE, ACTAGCOFF, FMSR, RXLCINT, TCA-RLTS, TXFLR, ACTALCOFF, TCA-TLTS, PSFAIL RSPI = DEM-LOS, LOF, UAS-RP, SUE-RP, TUE-RP, TCA-RP, TCA-OFS, FADE-ALM, RADRM, RPERR, MOD-LOS, RX-LOS, SD-RCV-DN, TX-LOS WS = LOS CNCT = XPIC-LOS, 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS, PIN-LOS

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

4-77

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP No.

LCT Command

4.2.1d BBIU

Set Alarm Attribute

UMN Unit BBIU

Functions EQPT = OPOR, OPD, LBOL, CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MIMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, ACTALS, ALSTST, ALSMAN, PSFAIL STM1RS = SUE-B1, TUE-B1, TCA-B1, TCA-OFS, LOS, STIM, UAS-B1 STM1MS = FERF, SUE-B2, TUE-B2, TCA-B2, UASFEBE, SUE-FEBE, TUE-FEBE, TCA-FEBE, SSMBCHG, LOOPBACK, CSESP, FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP, AIS AU4 = LOP, AIS, TCA-PJS UC = LOS CNCT = 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS

4.2.1d SCSU

Set Alarm Attribute

SCSU

SV = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, LOG-THC, TLOG-THC, SUBUNIT-FAIL, RCI). RUC (LOS). RSC (LOF). DCC (DCC-FAIL). RPS (PRCM). COM (ACTACO). CNCT (SINT-FAIL) ECU1,2 = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, RCI). DCC (DCC-FAIL) HK1,2 = EQPT (same as ECU1,2) TCU = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, WKSWP, RCI, MANSW, FRCDSW, FRZSW, PSFAIL). CLKBIT (LOS-2MB, AIS, FAL). CLKHZ (LOS-2MH). SYNC (SWTOHO, SWTOINT, HOLDOVER, INTERNAL, MANSW, EXTCLKCUTOFF, QUALITY-DOWN, SYNSW PRI1/2/3)

4.2.1e

Set Trace

BBIU

e1

Set OHB

BBIU

J0 Byte (N/STMID/TRC) for Trace

e2

Set Trace Value

BBIU

Expect Trace, Sending Trace, MIS-STI Alarm OFF

f

Set Signal Label

BBIU

f1

Set OHB

BBIU

Usage of SOH for signal label

f2

Set SLB Value

BBIU

Signal label value

4.2.2

Set Radio Interface

MSTU

a

Set RSPI

MSTU

Recovery (and Generation) of BERALM, Route ID, SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)

b

Set Radio Channel

MSTU

Frequency CH, Local Clock Master/Slave, MOD/DEM function

c

Set Facility Threshold

MSTU

SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS

d

Set Level Threshold

MSTU

RL-1, RL-2, TL (dBm)

e

Set Auto Control

f

Set RSC

Transmit MSTU

ATPC Mode ATPC Initiator Level (dBm)

X(Prot)/Y(Main), DSC SEL (P/W1 to 7)

Set Way side traffic

MSTU

SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)

4.2.4

Set User Channel

BBIU

64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)

4.2.5

Set Radio User Channel

All

RUCVFT(dBr), RUCVFR(dBr), (CODIRE/CONTRA)

4.3

4-78

(LOW/HIGH/AUTO)

All

4.2.3

Inhibit

64K Interface

System

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

No.

LCT Command

Unit

Functions

4.3.1

Set NE ID

All

NE ID = TID = System ID

4.3.2

Set Date and Time

All

Current date and time

4.3.3

Set System Configuration

All

System Type, RF Type, FRQ Arrangement, Space Diversity, Line Interface, BBIU Use, Group1 Max CH, Group 2 Max CH, Group 1 RPS (Y/N), Group 2 RPS (Y/N)

4.3.4

Set Optional Configuration

4.3.5

Set Interface Configuration All

Sets BB INTF configuration N/OPTL1/OPTL2/OPTL3

4.3.6

Set PM Time

All

Standard time for Performance Monitor start

4.3.7

Set Housekeeping Alarm

SCSU

Alarm Severity, Alarm Type, Alarm Message

4.3.8

Set Ext. Control Name

SCSU

Control Type

4.3.9

Set Alarm Delay

All

ALM ACT Time (0/2.5/10), ALM DACT Time (0/16)

4.3.10

Set Synchronization

All

a

Set Synch Mode

All

Synch Mode = ½

b

Set Synch Parameter

All

CLK MODE (TCU/THROUGH), EC Priority (1/2), LC Priority (1/2/3), Ext 2Mhz, Ext 2Mb/s, EC output 2Mbit EC Threshold, LC Threshold, Error Free (Y/N)

4.3.11

Unit All

ECU (Y/N), HK unit (Y/N), TCU Protection

Set Radio Protection Sys

a

Set System Parameter

All

Maximum CH, Priority CH, Wait to Restore, OCC Use

b

Set SW Initiator

All

SW Initiator (Y/N)

4.3.12

Set MSP

BBIU

Lock in Function, Switching Count, Monitor Time, Hold Time, Direction, Persist Check Time, Uni/Bi Code Mask, MSP Mode Setting

4.3.13

Set ALS

BBIU

ALS Function (Y/N), Release Time

4.3.14

Set Equipment Inventory

All

Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No. NE-Type, Resource Status, Eqpt-Note

4.3.15

Set LBK Release Time

4.3.16

Set Orderwire

a

Set OHB

BBIU

E1 (Y/N), E2 (Y/N)

b

Channel Select

All

E1/2 (N/GP-W1/ GP-W2/....)

c

OW Function

All

OW Function (Y/N), Group Address, Station Address, LED, Buzzer, Relay, Ringer

d

OW Extension

All

OW Extension E1/2, OW VF TX/RX (-dBr)

All

Mode 1 (Normal = yellow) / Mode 2 (Normal = green)

4.3.17 4.4

Loopback RLS Time (hour)

Set LED Mode Section DCC

4.4.1

SDCC Service State

All

In service/Out of Service

4.4.2

LAPD Parameter

All

Window Size, Frame Timeout, Inact Timeout, Retries, Frame Size, LAPD Cmd/Rsp, LAPD Data Link

4.4.3

Set 2 DCC

All

2 DCC CH selection

nd

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

nd

4-79

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP No. 4.5

LCT Command

UMN Unit

Functions

OSS Interface

4.5.1

OSSI type & Service State All

X25/OSI/Back to Back, IS/OOS

4.5.2

LAPB Parameter

All

Type, Window Retransmit

4.5.3

X25 Parameter

All

X25 Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Restart Timer, Request Timeout, Reset Timeout, Clear Timeout, Closed User ID, Channel-Lower, ChannelUpper

4.5.4

VC Parameter

All

PVC = Group No. CH NO. Peer Address

Size,

Retry

Timer,

Packet

Size,

SVC = Peer Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Ntwk User ID 4.6

Network Layer Protocol

4.6.1

NLP Parameter

All

NLP Type (IS1/IS1 IS2/ES), Area Address, System ID

4.6.2

NLP Manual Adjacency

All

NLP Type (SVC/PVC), Area Address, System ID

4.6.3

NLP Address Prefix

All

NLP Type (SVC), Area Prefix

4.6.4

NLP Manual Area Address All

Manual Area Address

4.6.5

Display NLP Manual Area All Address

Scope (LCL/NTWK)

4.6.6

NLP Intermediate Sys1

All

Max Area

4.6.7

NLP Intermediate Sys2

All

Reachable Area Address

4.7

TARP Control

TID Address Resolution Protocol Control

4.7.1

TARP Parameters

All

TARP Type, Response Time

4.7.2

TARP Manual Adjacency

All

Adjacency NTWK Address, Destination NTWK Address, NPL Type

4.7.3

Display TARP Adjacency

4.7.4

Display TARP Cache

All

Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address, TID List

4.7.5

Operate TARP Echo

All

Destination TID, System ID, NTWK Address, Request Working Address, Retries, Response Timer, TID List

All

TARP Packet, Packet Size, LAN SAP, Service State

4.8

4-80

LAN Parameters

Manual All

Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

No. 6

4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

LCT Command

Unit

Functions

Administration

6.1

Add User

All

Adds and defines a new LCT user for the NE

6.2

Delete User

All

Deletes a LCT user from the NE

6.3

Change User

All

Changes privilege of a user

6.4

Change Password

6.5

Show User List

All

Shows the user list registered for the NE

6.6

Show Logged User Privilege

All

Shows privilege of the user now logged on to the NE

Logged

User All

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Changes the password of user now logged on to the NE

4-81

UMN

5

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE General Maintenance Philosophy During normal operation, the Siemens SRT 1F microwave radio system requires no intrusive maintenance work by maintenance personnel. The main duties of maintenance & operation are: •

Keep tidy and clean the equipment and the environment.

•

Observe alarm/status information and record properly.

•

In case of system failure, locate the fault and rectify it.

•

If any unit has failed, replace with a spare unit and recover the system.

Human Machine Interface For maintenance & operation interface, the SRT 1F provides:

5.1

•

LED indications on each unit.

•

Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) to extend alarm/status information outside the SRT 1F equipment.

LED Indications The SV (Supervisory) unit of SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) indicates the summary of alarms/status conditions. The LEDs on SV unit are visible through the SCSU front cover. Each unit has LEDs for local indication of the alarm/status summary. The LEDs on each unit will be observed by removing the front cover. Details of alarm/status shall be observed through the LCT (Local terminal) or Centralized SV. Alarm indications, to be displayed or not displayed, are set by “Alarm Severity of Set Alarm Attribute, Facility, Provisioning” through the LCT. Figure 5.1 and Table 5.1 show LED indications of the SV unit. Figure 5.2 and Table 5.2 shows LED indications of other unit.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-1

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN

SV UNIT/RCI LINE MISC ACS/SWDL BACK UP

NORM CR/MJ/RCI MN/WR

LCT

MAINT CARD OUT ACO

LAN

CALL E1 2W E1

X25/BTB

CALL E2 ACO SW

2W E2 LED TEST

LED Indicator D-sub 9 (f)

Push SW

Dip switch

Modular Jack

Figure 5.1 - Front View of SV unit

5-2

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Table 5.1 - LED Indication of SV unit LED Indication Group

LED

Color

Status

Description

Indication for SV unit

UNIT/RCI

Red

Steady on

Unit failure of SV unit Log memory threshold crossed

Blinking

RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit

Green (Y)

Steady on

Normal operation of SV unit

Yellow (G)

Blinking

Configuration mismatch of SV unit

Red

Steady on

SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure

Green (Y)

Steady on

SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal

MISC

Red

Steady on

Housekeeping alarm (DI) on

ACS/SWDL

Green (Y)

Steady on

NE is logged on by user

Red

Steady on

Mismatch of software version

Yellow (G)

Blinking

Software download is on progress

BACK UP

Yellow (G)

Steady on

Back up of setting data is on progress

NORM

Green (Y)

Steady on

Normal operation of NE

CR/MJ/RCI

Red

Steady on

CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE

Blinking

RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in NE

LINE

Indication for NE

Orderwire

Note :

MN/WR

Red

Steady on

MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE

MAINT

Yellow (G)

Steady on

Maintenance condition of NE

CARD OUT

Red

Steady on

CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than WR

Yellow (G)

Steady on

CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious than WR

ACO

Yellow (G)

Steady on

Alarm cut off of NE

CALL E1

Green (Y)

Blinking

E1 orderwire is being called

CALL E2

Green (Y)

Blinking

E2 orderwire is being called

Green (Y)

= Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.

Yellow (G)

= Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-3

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN

UNIT/RCI LINE

Figure 5.2 - LED Indication of Other Unit

Table 5.2 - LED Indication of Other Unit

5-4

Unit

LED

Color

Status

Description

All units

UNIT/RCI

Red

Steady on

Unit failure of the unit

Blinking

RCI (Remote Card Identifier) is operated

Green (Y)

Steady on

Normal operation of the unit

Yellow (G)

Blinking

Configuration mismatch of the unit

Red

Steady on

Loss of Main, Synch or other signal

Green (Y)

Steady on

Line signal (working side) is normal

Steady on

SWDL (Software Download) is on progress

All units except HK

LINE

SV unit

SWDL

Yellow (G)

Note :

Green (Y)

= Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.

Yellow (G)

= Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.2

LCT The LCT (Local terminal) is the main human machine interface for operation & maintenance and system set-up (turn-up). Table 5.3 shows the outline of LCT function. Table 5.3 - Outline of LCT Function 1

File

Establishes/exits communication to NE

2

Session

Logs on/logs off to NE

3

TL1

Creates and sends out TL1 commands

4

Provisioning

Sets the system configuration Sets the usage of SOH Sets alarm severity and threshold level Sets parameters of NE

5

Status/Control

Displays alarms/status Displays error performance monitor Displays analog data of radio section Controls radio protection switch Controls other maintenance switches Sets analog level of radio section

6

Administration

Administrates LCT users

7

Window

Manages window display of LCT

8

Help

Shows help and version information of LCT application

More details are available in this equipment manual. The LCT application software on 3.5 inch diskettes is supplied by Siemens. The customer is requested to install the software onto a Personal Computer. Table 5.4 shows the minimum requirement of hardware to install and operate the LCT software. Table 5.4 - Hardware Requirement CPU

Pentium 90 or faster

DRAM

16 MB or more

HD space

200 MB (Minimum available space)

Diskette drive

3.5 inch for software setup

Recommended Monitor

800 × 600 16 bit color mode

OS

MS Windows 98 or Windows NT 4.0 (English version)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-5

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.2.1

UMN

Start-up LCT Operation Connect the LCT terminal to the SV unit of SCSU block with an RS232C straight cable (9-pin D-sub male to female).

Warning If you use a desk top PC, connect ground terminals together to prevent likely damage to components due to electrical surges. Turn on the power of LCT terminal, then start the LCT application. Log on to NE (SRT 1F equipment) When the LCT screen appeares, click [ Logon ] button of the Tool Bar (2) and wait until Tid.log window comes up. Enter System ID (TID), User name, Password and click [ OK ]. Figure 5.3 shows an example of LCT display after logging on. If you cannot log on to NEs (Network Element; SRT 1F equipment), check the communication setting between the LCT and the local NE by opening Session Þ Comm setup from the Main Menu Bar (1). When the LCT has logged on to the NE, the Shelf window (4) and Global View (3) will be displayed on the screen. Multiple Log on Maximum 3 NEs in the DCC (Digital Communication Channel) can be logged on simultaneously by a LCT terminal. However you cannot log on to any NE outside of the DCC area of the connected LCT. Alarm Report Alarm summary of NE is indicated through a change of the colours of the icons on the Global View window.

5-6

Icon of Unit picture

Icon on Global View

Alarm Severity

Red

Red

Critical

Orange

Major

Yellow

Minor

Brown

Warning

Green (LED mode 2)

Green (LED mode 2)

Normal

Yellow (LED mode 1)

Yellow (LED mode 1)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Alarm/Control To supervise/control the logged NE, click Status/Control of Main Menu Bar (1) and select the sub-menu following the LCT command tree. Details of the LCT command tree are available in this manual.

(1) →  File Session TL1 Provisioning Status/Control Administration Window Help Options About • Close × TL1 (2) → Logon ⊂⊃ Logoff ⊂⊃ Open

(3) →

 Global View   COMMON SCSU  SCSU  Group 1  GROUP1 - MSTU  GROUP1 - BBIU  Group 2  GROUP2 - MSTU  GROUP2 - BBIU



Exit Þ

Group 1 : GROUP1 - MSTU

A  

(4) → (5) → (6) →

 

 

 

M S T U

M S T U

M S T U

M S T U

P

W 1

W 2

W 3

C

C

C

C

← (7) UNIT LINE

(8) → SENT>> RTRV-LED-ALL:: RESP>>11-12-2001

Note : (1) : Main Menu Bar (2) : Tool Bar (3) : Global View (4) : Shelf Window (5) : Unit Picture (6) : Check mark (“C” mark) to show applicable unit (7) : Alarm Icon of Unit picture (8) : Output

Figure 5.3 - Example of LCT Display Quick View/Control (click right button) For quick view/control of NE, click the right mouse button on the applicable space. Menus required for routine operation & maintenance will be displayed. New/Last alarm reports are displayed by clicking the right mouse button. Last Alarm Report: the alarm message already retrieved. New Alarm Report: the alarm message newly generated after the previous retrieve command. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-7

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN

Global View window

: All alarms of the NE

Open space of Shelf window

: All alarms of the shelf selected

Unit of Shelf window

: Alarms of the unit selected

Table 5.5 shows the quick view/control menu of each unit. Table 5.5 - Quick View/Control (Right Click) Shelf

BBIU

TCU

HK

ECU

SV

BBC

BB INTF

MSTU

Unit

SCSU

New Alarm Report : Card

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

Last Alarm Report : Card

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

New Alarm Report : Shelf

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

Last Alarm Report : Shelf

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

Close Shelf

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

Set OHB

(V)*

V

Set RSPI

V

Set Radio Channel

V

Set Facility Threshold

V

Set Level Threshold

V

Set Automatic Transmit Control

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

ALS Release (OPT INTF only)

V

Display Log Files

V

Display Current Level

V

Display History Level

V

Display Threshold Crossing Seconds

V

Display CSES Log

V

Change Maintenance State

V

Radio Physical Interface

V

RSPI Adjustment

V

V

Display Equipment Inventory Display Unit Inventory

V V

V

V

V

Note: * Set OHB of MSTU is not applicable if BBIU is installed.

5-8

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Auto Report If wanting the NE to display the latest conditions automatically reflecting any change of alarm/status, execute Status/Control Þ Auto Report Control Þ Allow Alarm Report Þ Allow LED Report Þ Allow Report Allow Report is canceled when the user logs off from the NE. Other commands remain valid until the user execute Inhibit Alarm (LED) Report.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-9

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN

Unit Status Unit status, such as In Service, Out of Service, Active, Standby, Unequipped or Removed, is indicated by the colors of unit icons on the Shelf window as follows: Color

Primary State

Secondary State

Gray Unit LED = Green*

In Service (IS)

Active (ACT)

Gray Unit LED = White

In Service (IS)

Stand-by (STB)

Green

Out of service (OOS) Memory administration (MA)

Yellow

Removed

Purple

Not configured

No color

Out of supervisory through LCT

Unit LED* : Active Unit is green coloured for Mode 2, and yellow for Mode 1.

Selecting Unit Some of Provisioning or Status/Control menus are unit related. Appropriate unit(s) have to be selected before executing the menu command. 1.

Select the required menu by clicking on the Main Menu Bar (1) first.

2.

To select a unit to be supervised/controlled, click on an applicable unit which is marked with a [ C ]. The selected unit icon will be recessed.

3.

Then click any open space within the shelf window to activate the menu command.

It might be possible to select multiple units. However, if selecting mismatched units, the LCT will reject your unit selection by displaying a warning message.

5-10

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.2.2

Alarm (Condition) Type and Description This section sorts out alarm details to be indicated by the LCT. Alarm severity can be changed through the LCT if required by the operation conditions. Alarm indications through unit LED are also affected by alarm severity. NA (No Alarm) and NR (No Report) will not be indicated by unit LEDs. NR (No Report) does not send out the message from the NE. NR can reduce the traffic of alarm message on the DCC line. The full list of alarm/condition items and severity change menu are available: Provisioning Þ Facility Þ Set Baseband Interface Þ Set Alarm Attribute

Unit

AID Type

MSTU

EQPT

Abb.

Severity

CR

Critical

MJ

Major

MN

Minor

NA

No Alarm

Not displayed by LED, LCT

NR

No Report

Messages are not sent out from the NE.

Alarm Type

Notes Affects on the traffic transmission directly.

Description

Status

CARD-FAIL

Card (Unit) Failure

Alarm

RMVD

Unit is Removed

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CM

Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch)

Alarm

MISMOUNT-NC

Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting)

Alarm

RCI

Remote Card Identifier is given

Condition

FAN-FAIL

Fan Failure

Alarm

XPIC-OFF

XPIC is Off

Condition

(for co-channel operation system) DEM-FLR

DEM block Failure

Alarm

QAM DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of QAM DEM LSI) MOD-FLR

MOD block Failure

Alarm

MOD DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of MOD DEM LSI) ACTCW

Carrier Wave in Active Condition

Condition

Modulation is suspended for maintenance RX-FLR

RX block Failure

Alarm

IF output failure occurred

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-11

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Unit

AID Type

MSTU

EQPT

Alarm Type ACTEPSOFF

UMN Description

Status

EPS-OFF in Active Condition

Condition

(for SD reception) ACTSDDADE

SD-DADE in Active Condition

Condition

MSTU is in SD-DADE adjustment mode ACTAGCOFF

AGC-OFF in Active Condition

Condition

AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of RX is Off (manual) = maintenance FMSR

Frequency Measurement

Condition

ALC, AGC and EPS are OFF for IF-IF measurement RXLCINT

RX Local is Internal

Condition

(for co-channel operation system) TCA-RLTS

Alert of RX Receive Level Threshold Crossing Condition Seconds

TX-FLR

TX block Failure

Alarm

TX output level is out of ± 3 dB ACTALCOFF

ALC-OFF in Active Condition

Condition

ALC (Automatic Level Control) of TX is Off (Manual) = maintenance

MSTU

RSPI

TCA-TLTS

Alert of TX Transmit Level Threshold Crossing Condition Seconds

PSFAIL

Power Supply Failure

Alarm

DEM-LOS

Loss of Signal in DEM block

Alarm

Input signal loss to QAM DEM LSI LOF

Loss of Frame occurred

Alarm

Frame alignment loss of Radio frame. UAS-RP

Unavailable Seconds by RP (Radio Parity)

Condition

SUE-RP

Start of Unavailability Event by RP

Condition

TUE-RP

Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by RP

Condition

TCA-RP

Threshold Crossing Alert of RP

Condition

TCA-OFS

Threshold Crossing Alert of Out of Frame Second

Condition

FADE-ALM

Fading alarm

Alarm

Degradation of received IF spectrum and BER ALM of radio parity occurred RADRM

Radio Route ID Mismatch

Alarm

RP-ERR

Excessive Bit Error Rate (RP)

Alarm

MOD-LOS

Loss of Signal in MOD block

Alarm

Input signal loss to QAM MOD LSI

5-12

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

Unit

AID Type

MSTU

RSPI

Alarm Type RX-LOS

Description Loss of Signal in RX

Status Alarm

MN-RCV-DN or SD-RCV-DN occurred MN-RCV-DN

MN RX Received level Down to squelch level Alarm (equivalent to BER = 10-3)

SD-RCV-DN

SD RX Received level Down to squelch level Alarm -3 (equivalent to BER = 10 )

TX-LOS

Loss of Signal in TX

Alarm

10 dB down IF input level occurred

MSTU

WS

LOS

Loss of Signal WS input occurred

Alarm

MSTU

CNCT

XPIC-LOS

Loss of Signal in XPIC

Alarm

6MCLK-LOS

Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz)

Alarm

Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz) from TCU to MSTU STM-LOS

Loss of Signal STM

Alarm

PIN-LOS

Loss of Protection Signal

Alarm

Loss of signal from Prot CH was detected at USW

BBIU

EQPT

OPOR

Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range

Alarm

(OPT INTF only) OPD

Degradation in Optical Power transmitted

Alarm

(OPT INTF only) LBOL

Laser bias current is too high

Alarm

Laser bias of OPT INTF exceeded the threshold. CARD-FAIL

Card (Unit) Failure

Alarm

RMVD

Unit is Removed

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CM

Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch)

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CN

Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting)

Alarm

RCI

Remote Card Identifier is given

Condition

ACTALS

Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function active

Condition

ALS of OPT INTF unit is enabled ALSTST

Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released Condition by Test restart Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by “Test = 90 seconds”

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-13

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Unit

AID Type

BBIU

EQPT

Alarm Type ALSMAN

UMN Description

Status

Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released Condition by Manual restart Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by “Manual = 2 seconds”

BBIU MSTU*

STM1RS

PSFAIL

Power Supply Failure

Alarm

SUE-B1

Start of Unavailability Event by B1

Condition

TUE-B1

Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B1

Condition

TCA-B1

Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition cumulative number of Background Block Errors by B1 BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period

TCA-LOS

Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due cumulative number of Loss of Signal seconds

LOS

Loss of Signal occurred

to Condition Alarm

Loss of STM1 signal input occurred.

BBIU MSTU

STM1MS

STIM

Section Trace ID Mismatch occurred

Alarm

UAS-B1

Unavailable Seconds (B1)

Alarm

FERF

Far End Receive Failure occurred

Alarm

SUE-B2

Start of Unavailability Event by B2

Condition

TUE-B2

Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B2

Condition

TCA-B2

Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition cumulative number of Background Block Errors of B2 BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period

5-14

UAS-FEBE

Unavailable Seconds of FEBE (Far End Block Error)

Alarm

SUE-FEBE

Start of Unavailability Event by FEBE

Condition

TUE-FEBE

Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by FEBE

Condition

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

Unit

AID Type

BBIU MSTU

STM1MS

Alarm Type TCA-FEBE

Description

Status

Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition cumulative number of Background Block Errors by FEBE BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period

SSMBCHG

Synchronization Status Message Byte changed

Condition

LOOPBACK

Loopback in Active condition

Condition

CSESP

Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Alarm occurred Error rate of Protection CH exceeded Severely Errored threshold consecutively

BBIU

AU4

FESP

Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period

TESP

Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period

FSEP

Severely Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period

TSEP

Severely Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal is received

Alarm

LOP

Loss of Pointer occurred

Alarm

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal is received

Alarm

TCA-PJS

Threshold Crossing Alert of Pointer Justification Condition Seconds BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period

BBIU

UC

LOS

Loss of input Signal

Alarm

BBIU

CNCT

6MCLK-LOS

Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz)

Alarm

Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz) from TCU to MSTU STM-LOS

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Loss of Signal STM input

Alarm

5-15

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Unit

AID Type

UMN

Alarm Type

Description

Status

SCSU SV

EQPT

CARD-FAIL

Card (Unit) Failure

Alarm

LOG-THC

Log memory Threshold Crossed

Alarm

TLOG-THC

Transaction Log memory Threshold Crossed

Alarm

SUBUNIT-FAIL

Sub-unit Failure

Alarm

RCI

Remote Card Identifier is given

Condition

RUC

LOS

Loss of input Signal of RUC occurred

Alarm

RPS

PRCM

Priority Channel Mismatch

Alarm

COM

ACTACO

Alarm Cut Off in Active Condition

Condition

Audible alarm extension is cut off

ECU

CNCT

SINT-FAIL

Serial Interface Failure

Alarm

EQPT

CARD-FAIL

Card (Unit) Failure

Alarm

RMVD

Unit is Removed

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CM

Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch)

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CN

Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting)

Alarm

RCI

Remote Card Identifier is given

Condition

ECU

DCC

DCC-FAIL

DCC Failure

Alarm

HK

EQPT

CARD-FAIL

Card (Unit) Failure

Alarm

RMVD

Unit is Removed

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CM

Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch)

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CN

Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting)

Alarm

RCI

Remote Card Identifier is given

Condition

CARD-FAIL

Card (Unit) Failure

Alarm

RMVD

Unit is Removed

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CM

Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch)

Alarm

MISMOUNT-CN

Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting)

Alarm

WKSWP

Working unit is Switched by manually or automatically

RCI

Remote Card Identifier is given

Condition

MANSW

TCU is Manually switched to stand-by

Condition

TCU

5-16

EQPT

to

Protection Condition

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN Unit

TCU

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE AID Type

CLTBIT

Alarm Type

Description

Status

FRCDSW

TCU is Forcibly switched to stand-by

Condition

FRZSW

TCU unit protection is in freeze condition

Condition

PSFAIL

Power Supply failure

Alarm

LOS-2MB

Loss of 2Mb/s clock signal input

Alarm

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal is received

Alarm

FAL

Frame Alignment Loss occurred

Alarm

Synchronization loss of Frame Alignment signal occurred TCU

CLKHZ

LOS-2MH

Loss of 2MHz clock signal input

Alarm

TCU

SYNC

SWTOHO

Synchronization reference is Switched to Holdover by manually or automatically

Condition

SWTOINT

Synchronization reference is Switched to Internal Condition by manually or automatically

HOLDOVER

Synchronizing clock signal is in Holdover state

Condition

TCU has lost the input reference clock signal and running in the Holdover mode. INTERNAL

Synchronizing clock signal is in Internal state

Condition

TCU is running in the Internal oscillation mode

TCU

SYNC

MANSW

Switch is in Manual switch mode

Condition

EXTCLK-CUTOFF

External Clock signal is Cut Off

Alarm

QUALITY-DOWN

Quality of the synchronization clock signal has deteriorated

Alarm

SYNSWPRI1

Synchronization Switched to Priority 1 reference Condition by manually or automatically

SYNSWPRI2

Synchronization Switched to Priority 2 reference Condition by manually or automatically

SYNSWPRI3

Synchronization Switched to Priority 3 reference Condition by manually or automatically

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-17

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.2.3

UMN

Performance Monitor Transmission performances across the SRT 1F section are monitored by detecting parity error of B1 (STM1RS), B2 (STM1MS) and Radio parity (RSPI) (factory user only). Error performances are displayed: Status/Control Þ Performance Monitor Þ Display PM Data Radio Protection Switching count and duration (PSC, PSD) also show the stability of SRT 1F transmission system. PSC and PSD are displayed: Status/Control Þ Radio Protection Switch Þ Group 1 or Group 2 Þ CH No. and BSW/USW selection Þ Display PM Data The following table shows Performance monitor types and their description/threshold level.

Unit(AID)

BBIU or

Monitor Types

BBE

MSTU

Background Block Error The number of errored block which is detected during the normal operation period except the duration of SES and UAS.

(STM1MS)

15-MIN : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215) 1-DAY : 0 to 4294967295 units (default = 4294967295)

(STM1RS) (RSPI = before Error Correction)

Description and Threshold Levels

BBE for VC4

Background Block Error for VC4 15-MIN : 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215)

BBER

Background Block Error Ratio 15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.4E-7 1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.4E-9

ES

Errored Seconds The number of second which contains at least one block error during the Available time. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)

5-18

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN Unit(AID)

continued;--

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Monitor Types

ESR

BBIU or

Errored Second Ratio 15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.1E-3 1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.2E-5

MSTU (STM1MS)

Description and Threshold Levels

SES

Severely Errored Seconds

(STM1RS)

The number of second which contains Errored Blocks (EB) more than Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) during the Available time.

(RSPI = before Error Correction)

15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400) SESR

Severely Errored Second Ratio

SEV

Severely Errored Threshold The percentage of Errored Block which defines Severely Errored Second (SES) and Unavailability Second (UAS). 10 to 50 % (default = 30)

SEVR

Severely Errored Threshold Ratio 10 to 50 % (default = 30)

UAF

Unavailability Filter The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) which defines Unavailability Seconds (UAS). 2 to 10 seconds (default = 10)

UAFR

Unavailability Filter Ratio 2 to 10 seconds (default = 10)

UAS

Unavailability Seconds The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) which is defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF). In case of UAF = 10 sec, a period of UAS starts when Errored Block (EB) in each second exceeds SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and terminates when EB does not exceed SEV for 10 consecutive seconds. 15-MIN : 1 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 1 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)

OFS

Out of Frame Seconds The number of seconds which contains at least one occasion of synchronization loss of the frame alignment signal. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)

NSES

Number of Severely Errored Seconds Threshold of CSES (Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds) 15-MIN : 2 to 9 seconds (default = 9)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-19

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

Unit(AID)

BBIU (PE INTF)

Monitor Types

PJCH PJCL

UMN

Description and Threshold Levels

Pointer Justification Count High Pointer Justification Count Low The number of frame which contains at least one occasion of pointer justification decrement (PJCH) or increment (PJCL). 15-MIN : 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215)

PJS

Pointer Justification Seconds The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PJCH and/or PJCL. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)

MSTU (RPS)

PSAC-B PSAC-U

Protection Switch Actual Count BSW Protection Switch Actual Count USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation (BSW and USW respectively). 15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times

PSAD-B PSAD-U

Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW Protection Switch Actual Duration USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PSACB and PSAC-U respectively. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds

PSC

Protection Switch Count The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U 15-MIN : 0 to 230400 times 1-DAY : 0 to 22118400 times

PSRC-B PSRC-U

Protection Switch Request Count BSW Protection Switch Request Count USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including PSACB/U and invalid request due to persistence (BSW and USW respectively). 15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times

PSRSAD-B PSRSAD-U

Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation (BSW and USW respectively). 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds

5-20

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.2.4

Analog Monitor Analog value of transmitter/receiver of MSTU can be displayed: Status/Control Þ Analog Monitor Þ Display Current Level / History Level / Threshold Crossing Seconds Threshold Level RL-1, RL-2 and TL can be set: Provisioning Þ Facility Þ Set Radio Interface Þ Set Level Threshold Tolerance: ± 3 dB between –35 –65 dB The following table shows Analog Monitor Types and the threshold level.

Display

Current Level

Monitor Types

RL-M

Description and Threshold Levels

Receive Level of Main Antenna The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the Main antenna. -15 to -80 dBm

RL-SD

Receive Level of SD (Space Diversity) Antenna The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the SD antenna. -15 to -80 dBm

TL

Transmit Level The RF transmit level at the output of MSTU. +19 to +35 dBm

History Level

RL-M-MAX

Receive Level of Main Antenna Maximum The maximum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm

RL-M-MIN

Receive Level of Main Antenna Minimum The minimum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm

RL-SD-MAX

Receive Level of SD Antenna Maximum The maximum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-21

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Display

continued;--

Monitor Types

RL-SD-MIN

History Level

UMN Description and Threshold Levels

Receive Level of SD Antenna Minimum The minimum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm

TL-MAX

Transmitted Level Maximum The maximum transmit level during the monitoring period. +19 to +35 dBm

TL-MIN

Transmitted Level Minimum The minimum transmit level during the monitoring period. +19 to +35 dBm

Threshold Crossed Seconds

RLTS-M-1

Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified by RL-1

RLTS-M-2

Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified by RL-2

RLTS-SD-1

Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified by RL-1

RLTS-SD-2

Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified by RL-2

TLTS

Transmit Level Threshold crossed Seconds 15-MIN: 1 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 1 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)

Threshold Level Setting

RL-1

Receive Level Threshold 1 15-MIN: -40 to -75 dBm (default = -60 dBm)

RL-2

Receive Level Threshold 2 15-MIN: -40 to -75 dBm (default = -60 dBm)

TL

Transmit Level Threshold 15-MIN: +22 to +32 dBm (default = +27 dBm)

5-22

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.2.5

Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) The Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) menu group is provided for the testing and special maintenance of the MSTU radio section. This menu group affects the channel traffic. Before executing any control on this menu group, switch over the traffic to the protection channel and change the Maintenance State of the channel to Remove. Status/Control Þ Maintenance Radio Interface Þ Change Maintenance State (Carry out before following sub-menus) Radio Physical Interface RSPI Adjustment Maintenance for SD Maintenance for Co-CH Dade Adjustment

Sub-Menu

Change Maint. State

Radio Physical Interface

Item

Description

Remove

Changes to Maint. State for following sub-menus.

Restore

Changes to In Service State for normal operation.

Retrieve

Displays the current status.

Carrier Wave ON

Stops modulation.

Auto Gain Cont. Off

Stops AGC of RX block for IF-IF characteristics measurement.

Auto Off

Level

Cont. Stops ALC of TX block for IF-IF characteristics measurement.

Frequency Measurement

Executes AGC OFF, ALC OFF and EPS OFF at once for IF-IF characteristics measurement.

RSPI Adjustment

TXPWR

Adjusts TX output power at ALC ON.

(Analog level adjustment)

TXGAIN

Adjusts TX output power at ALC OFF.

RXRFGAIN

Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF

RXIFGAIN

Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF

SDGAIN

Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF

SDSLOPE

Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF

SD DADE OFF

Stops SD DADE.

EPS OFF

Stops Endless Phase Shifter (EPS).

XPIC-OFF

Stops Cross Polarization Interference Cancellor.

RXCLINT

Stops RX Local synchronization.

DADEADJST

Adjusts baseband DADE for hitless RPS (USW) operation.

Maintenance for SD

Maintenance for Co-CH

Dade Adjustment Display Maint. State

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Displays above items in maintenance position.

5-23

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.3

UMN

Radio Protection Switch Supervise/control of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) is carried out through the LCT terminal. Log on The LCT must log on to the receive end of the direction to be supervised/controlled. To control the reverse direction, log in to the opposite station (NE). To open the Radio Protection Switch (RPS) window: Control/Status Þ Radio Protection Switch Þ Group 1 nd Group 2 (for 2 RPS group if the system has) To open the RPS window of the other NE, log on to the 2nd NE then repeat the above process. To display two windows simultaneously: Window Þ Tile Figure 5.4 shows the Radio Protection Switch window. USW/BSW The Unipolar Switch (USW) is operated Uni-directionally and in the hitless mode for manual control and for most of the automatic switching. The Bipolar Switch (BSW) is operated Bi-directionally and bears some data error. However, the BSW provides more secure isolation for testing and special maintenance work.

Prot Main 1

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

Prot Main 1

BB INTF

BSW

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

BSW

BB INTF

BB INTF

BSW

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

BSW

BB INTF

BB INTF

BSW

MSTU (USW)

MSTU (USW)

BSW

BB INTF

Main 2 Main 3

To/from Main N Unipolar signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal

Main 2 Main 3

To/from Main N Unipolar signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal

Figure 5.4 - Outline of Radio Protection Switch

5-24

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

Manual

Far End

↓

Lockout BU Ο Ο OCC

Force

Alarm

(5)

Near End

Lockout

BSW

Manual Force BU BU Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο W1

USW

W2

USW

BSW

Lockout B OCC Ο

BSW

USW

USW

BSW

Force Manual B B W1 Ο Ο Ο

Display SW PM

ΟΟ

Ο Ο Ο Ο W2

BSW

USW

USW

BSW

W2 Ο

Ο

Ο

Clear SW PM

ΟΟ

Ο Ο Ο Ο W3

BSW

USW

USW

BSW

W3 Ο

Ο

Ο

ΟΟ

Ο Ο Ο Ο W4

BSW

USW

USW

BSW

W4 Ο

Ο

Ο

ΟΟ

Ο Ο Ο Ο W5

BSW

USW

USW

BSW

W5 Ο

Ο

Ο

ΟΟ

Ο Ο Ο Ο W6

BSW

USW

USW

BSW

W6 Ο

Ο

Ο

ΟΟ

Ο Ο Ο Ο W7

BSW

USW

USW

BSW

W7 Ο

Ο

Ο

Set SW Initiator Set Sys

Refresh Close Help

↑ (1)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

↑ (3)

Control Button

SW Box

↑ (2)

Legend :

Normal : Fail :

↑ (4)

(black) (red) st

Lockout

Inhibits any type of RPS operation (1 priority).

Force

Forces the SW (2 priority).

Manual

Operates the SW manually (4 priority) .

ALARM

Displays the AID = RPS alarm.

Display SW PM Data

Displays PSAC, PSRC, PSAD and PSRSAD.

Clear SW PM Data

Clears SW PM data above.

Sets SW Initiator

Sets SW Initiator Enable/No.

Set Sys Parameter

Sets Max. CH, Priority CH, WTR and OCC

Refresh

Redraws the window to refresh the current condition.

Close

Close the RPS window.

Help

Displays Help.

BSW

Selects the SW for control (Bi-directional).

USW

Selects the SW for control (Uni-directional).

nd

th

Manual Control Ο in Green Indicator Ο in Red

Controlled (Operated)

Channel No.

W1 to W7

Main 1 channel to Main 7 channel.

OCC

Occasional traffic (option).

W2

Normal (Released).

Switched CH No. indication. This example shows Bi-directional auto switching by W2 unit failure.

Figure 5.5 - Radio Protection Switch window

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-25

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.3.1

UMN

Automatic Switching and Status Indication Normal CH is shown as a black solid line Failed CH is shown as a red dotted line The switched channel No. is displayed on the line of Prot. CH (5). A single arrow shows Uni-directional switching by USW. A double arrow shows Bi-directional switching by BSW. A red circled Manual Control Indicator (3) shows that the switch element is operated for Lockout, Force or Manual switching. Figure 5.5 shows the example that automatic Bi-directional switching of W2 (Main 2) is due to unit failure. In case of automatic switching, BSW operation caused by MSTU unit failure has priority over USW operation. Signal Failure (SF = Loss of Frame) has priority over Signal Degrade (SD = BER ALM and 1bit error) A priority channel shall be set to have priority over other channels, if the switch initiator is at the same level.

5.3.2

Manual Control The Radio Protection Switch (RPS) can be controlled manually through the LCT terminal. The following are the functions and priority order of the manual controls: Control

Lockout

Priority

Function

st

Inhibits any type of RPS operation.

nd

Switches the Main CH unless the specified Main CH or Prot CH is locked out.

rd

The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is free and normal.

1

Force

2

(Automatic)

3

The CH switched by Manual or OCC control will be chased out by automatic switching from Prot CH. th

The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is free and normal.

th

Occasional traffic transmission (option)

Manual

4

OCC

5

The lowest priority traffic is allowed when Prot CH is free and normal. The OCC traffic gives way to any other RPS command.

To operate manual control: Þ Click BSW or USW (2) of Near End, the SW box changes color from green to red. Þ Click Control button (1) confirmation boxes.

as required, then follow the instruction of

The Manual Control Indicator (3) changes color from green to red.

5-26

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.3.3

SW PM Data Switch Performance Monitoring (SW PM) Data shows the stability of radio propagation condition and RPS operation. Following items will be displayed;-PSAC-B PSAC-U

Protection Switch Actual Count BSW / USW

PSAD-B PSAD-U

Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW / USW

PSC

Protection Switch Count

Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation. The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PSAC-B / PSAC-U. The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U

PSRC-B PSRC-U

Protection Switch Request Count BSW / USW

PSRSAD-B PSRSAD-U

Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW / USW

Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including PSAC-B/U and invalid request due to WTR and persistence.

The number of second which contains at least one occasion of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation.

5.3.4

Auto Refresh To display the current status, click

Refresh control button.

If wanting to maintain the RPS window to automatically display the latest change, execute: Status/Control Þ Auto Report Control Þ Allow Report when you log on to the NE. Allow Report is automatically canceled if logging out from the NE.

Note : Auto Refresh function of RPS is subject to Alarm/condition setting.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-27

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.3.5

UMN

Notice for RPS Operation Operation of the Radio Protection System is very sensitive to traffic transmission. Following notice should be observed.

5.3.5.1

Power off of SCSU When turning off the power supply to SCSU, change the service state of RPS to OOS (Out of Service) in advance. Otherwise, the traffic may be briefly interrupted when turning on the power supply. Provisioning Þ Service State Þ Change RPS State Þ Group 1 or Group 2 Þ Delete Then log off the LCT from the NE.

5.3.5.2

Lockout WTR (Wait to Restore) also affects the LOCKOUT command also. If WTR is 4 (minutes) or 20 (minutes), the LOCKOUT command will be effective after the time delay specified by WTR. If wanting to execute the LOCKOUT immediately, change WTR setting to “ 0 “ as follows: Provisioning Þ System Þ Set Radio Protection System Þ Set System Parameter Þ Wait to Restore Þ 0 min

5.3.5.3

Power off of MSTU To prevent disconnection, the traffic should be BSW manually switched over to the Protection channel in advance. Status/Control Þ Radio Protection Switch Þ Group 1 or Group 2 Þ BSW of the channel to be switched off Þ Manual Þ Operate Note:

5-28

•

BSW operation is not hitless and briefly interrupts traffic.

•

If the USW is operated on such occasion, the message indicating USW operated will remain during the period that MSTU is power off.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.4 5.4.1

Maintenance Control of Other Functions Loop Back The Siemens SRT 1F is provided with the baseband loop back function. LINE side : From Baseband input to Baseband output (Facility) RADIO side: From DEM QAM module output to MOD QAM module input (Terminal). Without BBIU For the standard configuration of SE interface, the loop back is carried out at the MSTU unit. With BBIU For optional configuration of OPT interface and PE interface, loop back is carried out at the OPT INTF unit and the PE INTF unit, respectively. Loop Back test interrupts channel traffic. To safeguard traffic transmission, Loop Back operation is monitored through the Maintenance State . Before carrying out Loop Back, Change Maintenance State to remove the In Service state from the channel. To carry out Loop Back test: Control/Status Þ Loop Back Þ Change Maintenance State Þ Select the unit to be looped back Þ STM1MS LINE or STM1MS RADIO Þ Remove (Restore is to release loopback)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-29

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN MSTU MOD TX BSW DEM RX LINE side

BBIU

RADIO side

MSTU MOD TX BSW DEM RX

LINE side

RADIO side

Figure 5.6 - Loop Back Operation

5-30

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.4.2 5.4.2.1

Protection Switch Operation (MSP) Multiplex Section Protection In case of OPT INTF line protection, MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) is provided. In addition to automatic switching, MSP can be operated through the LCT either manually or inhibited from automatic switching. To carry out MSP manual operation: Control/Status of BBIU Þ Protection Switch Þ Operate Protection Switch Þ Select the channel to be operated Þ STM1MS LINE Þ MAN for manual switch or FRCD for forced switch or LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch Priority Order of MSP is: Lockout > Forced > Auto (Signal Failure) > Auto (Signal Degrade) > Manual

5.4.2.2

TCU unit Protection In case of TCU unit protection (two units of X and Y installed), the manual switch over of the working TCU is available through the LCT. To change the working TCU;-Control/Status of SCSU Þ Protection Switch Þ Operate Protection Switch Þ Select the TCU to remove from working condition Þ EQPT Þ MAN for manual switch or FRCD for forced switch or LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch

5.4.2.3

Synch Switch The synchronous source is automatically selected to the highest quality level currently available. The user can select the synchronous source manually, if necessary. To change the synchronous source manually: Control/Status of SCSU Þ Protection Switch Þ Operate Synch Switch Þ Select the TCU to change the synchronous source Þ EC for Equipment clock or LC for Line clock Þ PRI 1/PRI 2/PRI 3/INT/HO INT (Internal) and HO (Holdover) are not suitable for traffic transmission.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-31

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.4.3

UMN

ALS Release Laser emission of OPT INTF unit is automatically shutdown when the fiber optic cable is disconnected for personnel safety. Then the OPT INTF retransmits the output intermittently to recover the signal transmission at a specific interval. ALS Release is provided to restart the Laser emission through manual control, in addition to normal restarting stated above. MAN : Emits OPT INTF output for 2 seconds TST : Emits OPT INTF output for 90 seconds To operate ALS Release: Control/Status of BBIU Þ ALS Release Þ Select the channel to be operated Þ Restart Mode Þ MAN for 2 seconds emission or TST for 90 seconds emission.

5-32

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.5

Unit Replacement Warning Most of the unit replacement operations affect on the traffic transmission service. The maintenance staff must inform these operations to the Central Maintenance & Operation Center (CMOC) in advance.

5.5.1

Fan Replacement An MSTU is equipped with 4 air cooling fans. These fans should be replaced with spares when they are worn out. Table 5.6 shows the relationship of FAN alarm and equipment condition. When FAN alarm is detected, all 4 fans should be replaced with spares at once. Table 5.6 - FAN Alarm and Equipment Condition Number of Fan

Equipment

Working

Out

Alarm

Condition of MSTU

4

0

No alarm

Normal operation

3

1

FAN Alarm

Normal operation

2

2

FAN Alarm

TX output power is 10 dB down

1

3

UNIT Failure

Power supply off to MSTU. BSW operates

How to replace FANs 1.

Turn the rotary switch on MSTU to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW level and inhibit “Fan alarm”. See Figure 5.7.

2.

Pull out the FAN PWR cable.

3.

Remove the FAN assembly. See Figure 5.7.

4.

Mount a new FAN assembly and re-connect the FAN PWR cable securely.

5.

Turn back the rotary switch on MSTU to [ 0 ]

6.

Check alarm/status indications on LEDs and LCT.

7.

If normal, switch back the traffic from the protection channel.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-33

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN

Turn to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW level and inhibit “Fan alarm”

The FAN Assembly is mounted on to the MSTU by 4 long screws ➀ to ➃ and 4 short screws ➄ to ➇. Figure 5.7 - Replacement of FAN Assembly

5-34

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.5.2

MSTU and Other Units MSTU To replace an MSTU, the traffic should be switched over to the protection channel by forcing the BSW in advance, and by cutting off power to the unit. The BSW operation momentarily interrupts traffic. OPT INTF and PE INTF The traffic cannot be protected during the replacement work, unless the line (facility) is protected by MSP (for OPT INTF - X/Y only). The maintenance staff must carefully organize unit replacement in order to reduce traffic disconnection period. Units in SCSU Replacement of any unit other than that listed below may seriously affect traffic: •

TCU in stand-by (in case of card protection of TCU-X/Y).

•

HK unit.

System Setting Data System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU. When a unit is replaced with spares, the system setting data will be automatically transferred from the SV unit. There is no setting change after unit replacement. After unit replacement: •

Turn on power supply and wait at least 10 minutes to complete the system setting data download.

•

Check LED indication on SRT 1F equipment.

•

Check Alarm/status indication of Status/Control menu on the LCT.

•

Check Analog Monitoring of Status/Control menu on the LCT.

•

Check the applicable system setting of Provisioning menu on the LCT.

•

Check that Service State is In Service of Provisioning menu on the LCT.

•

Leave equipment for stability check at least 30 minutes.

•

Check Error Performance history by Display PM of Status/Control menu on the LCT.

•

Compare the above data with other channels.

•

Minimize setting change and re-adjustment of the replaced unit unless performance does not meet the long term specification. If setting change and re-adjustment is required, follow the instructions stated in par. “Acceptance and Turn up” of this manual.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-35

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.5.3

UMN

SV unit Replacement System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU. The data is stored in the Inner Memory on the main PCB and also in the Back-up Memory on the sub-unit. To replace the SV unit with a spare: •

Check that the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch operation).

•

Change the Service State of RPS from In Service (IS) to Out of Service (OOS). Provisioning Þ Service State Þ Change RPS State Þ Group 1 or Group 2 Þ Delete

•

Log off the LCT from the NE.

•

Wait until when (approx. 4 minutes)

•

Cut off power supply to the SCSU and remove the SV unit.

•

Remove the Back-up Memory sub-unit form the SV main PCB.

•

Fit the Back-up Memory sub-unit on to the spare SV.

•

Mount the spare SV on to the SCSU and turn on power supply to the SCSU.

•

Wait until when ACS/SWDL (approx. 5 minutes)

•

Log on the LCT to the NE.

•

Check LED indications SRT 1F equipment and Alarm/status conditions on the LCT.

•

Change the Service State of RPS from Out of Service (OOS) to In Service (IS).

BACK UP

LED of SV unit turns off

LED of SV unit turns off

Provisioning Þ Service State Þ Change RPS State Þ Group 1 or Group 2 Þ Enter

5-36

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE •

Check the RPS operations. If traffic interruption is not possible, check Manual operation of USW. If the failure of SV unit is extended to the RPS total operation, check all related functions.

Figure 5.8 shows the PCB of SV unit.

WARNING Do not cut off power supply to the SCSU unit when BACK UP LED is glowing, otherwise the system setting data may be damaged seriously.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-37

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN

VF/DGTL sub-unit

VF/DGTL sub-unit

Screw

Backup Memory

Front side

Connector side

Screw

Figure 5.8 - PCB of SV unit •

Caution --

This unit contains devices that may be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD) Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESD sensitive equipment.

5-38

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.5.4

Returning Replaced Unit Units for SRT 1F equipment are manufactured based on high density assembling and require special tools, jigs and measurement equipment for repair. Faulty unit should be returned to the manufacturer for repair For quick and adequate repair work, the following information must be stated on the unit. •

Unit name

•

Serial No.

•

Station name

•

Facing station name

•

Frequency band

•

Channel No.

•

System configuration

•

Date and time alarm/abnormality detected

•

Date and time the unit replaced

•

Detailed description of alarm/abnormality

•

Alarm/status log of the local station and associated stations

•

Error performance log of the local station and associated stations

•

Detailed description after unit replacement

The user can use its own report form. Table 5.7 shows an example of “Faulty Unit Report”

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-39

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

UMN

Table 5.7 - Faulty Unit Report (example)

FAULTY UNIT REPORT Unit Name

Serial No.

Station Name

Facing Station

Freq. Band

CH No. Freq.)

(TX

System Configuration No. of Main CHs BB Interface

 SE INTF  OPT INTF with MSP  OPT INTF w/o MSP  PE INTF

Prot CH

 Yes

Operation Sys

 Alternated  Co-channel

TCU

 with Stand-by  without Stand-by

 No

If you are returning an MSTU, please fill the below;-TX output dBm,

level

(specification)

= SD =  Yes

 No

Modulation Sys =  64QAM  128QAM Date/time hh:mm)

Alarm

detected

Date/time Unit replaced hh:mm)

(mm/dd/yy. (mm/dd/yy.

Details of alarm/status and other conditions of before unit replacement

Details of alarm/status and other conditions of after unit replacement

Other comments if any

5-40

Compiled by

Date (mm/dd/yy)

Checked by

Date (mm/dd/yy)

Approved by

Date (mm/dd/yy)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

5.6 5.6.1

APPENDIX LCT Command Tree and Functions The following table shows the Command tree of LCT (Local Terminal) and related functions.

No.

LCT Command

1

File

1.1

Unit

Functions

All

Displays the logged history of Personal Computer

Logfile

1.1.1

PC Message Log

1.1.2

NE Commands Log

Displays the logged history of NE commands

1.1.3

Transaction Log

Displays the logged history of Transaction message

1.2

Preference

All

Sets Alarm retrieve*, Alarm beep, Access mode, Auto time out * Alarm retrieve = mother option for “Auto Report Control”

1.3

2

Exit

All

Exits from the LCT application and close the LCT initial screen

All

Logs on to NEs

Session *

2.1

Log on

2.2*

Comm Setup (before log on)

2.2.1*

Port Setup

*

Sets Port No., Baud rate, Data bits, Stop bits, Parity

2.2.2*

Modem Setup

*

Sets Modem type, Dial prefix/suffix, Hangup prefix/suffix, Originate Seq. for connection via Modem

2.2.3*

Modem Dial

*

Establishes communication via Modem

2.2.4*

Modem Hang-up

*

Abandons Modem dial

2.2.5*

PAD Dial

*

Establishes communication via PAD

2.2.6*

PAD Hang-up

*

Abandons PAD dial

2.3

Log off

All

Logs off from NEs

2.4

Re-configure Screen

All

Redraws the shelf picture to reflect configuration change

2.5

ASCII Terminal

All

Opens “Hyper Terminal” to access to NE

All

Creates and sends TL1 commands

3 3.1

TL1 TL1 Command

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-41

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

No.

LCT Command

4

Provisioning

4.1

UMN

Unit

Service State

Functions

Changes Primary service state IS (In Service) and OOS (Out of Service) Enter = Changes from OOS to IS Delete = Changes from IS to OOS Retrieve = Displays current service state

4.1.1

Change EQPT State

BBIU

Service state of BB INTF unit

4.1.2

Change Facility State

BBIU

Service state of STM1RS facility

4.1.3

Change RPS State

All

Service state of Radio Protection System

a

Group 1

All

Service state of RPS Group 1

b

Group 2

All

Service state of RPS Group 2

4.2 4.2.1 a

Facility Set Baseband Interface Set OHB

All BBIU (MSTU)

Usage of RSOH and MSOH STM1RS = J0, E1, D1 to D3, B1 STM1MS = MS AIS, MS FERF, E2, D4 to D12 SSBIT, B2, K1K2, Z1,Z2

b

Set Facility Threshold

BBIU

Threshold level of error performance STM1RS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS STM1MS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, AU4 = PJS

c

Set Facility Group

BBIU

Excessive Error initiator Signal Fail/Signal Degrade Signal Degrade Threshold = 1E-5 to 1E-9

d

Set Alarm Attribute

4.2.1d MSTU

Set Alarm Attribute

Alarm severity and SA/NSA of following items MSTU

EQPT = CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, FAN-FAIL, XPIC-OFF, DEM-FLR, MOD-FLR, ACTCW, RX-FLR, ACTEPSOFF, ACTSDDADE, ACTAGCOFF, FMSR, RXLCINT, TCA-RLTS, TX-FLR, ACTALCOFF, TCA-TLTS, PSFAIL RSPI = DEM-LOS, LOF, UAS-RP, SUE-RP, TUE-RP, TCA-RP, TCA-OFS, FADE-ALM, RADRM, RPERR, MOD-LOS, RX-LOS, SD-RCV-DN, TXLOS WS = LOS CNCT = XPIC-LOS, 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS, PIN-LOS

5-42

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN No. 4.2.1d BBIU

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE LCT Command Set Alarm Attribute

Unit

Functions

BBIU

EQPT = OPOR, OPD, LBOL, CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MIMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, ACTALS, ALSTST, ALSMAN, PSFAIL STM1RS = SUE-B1, TUE-B1, TCA-B1, TCA-OFS, LOS, STIM, UAS-B1 STM1MS = FERF, SUE-B2, TUE-B2, TCA-B2, UASFEBE, SUE-FEBE, TUE-FEBE, TCA-FEBE, SSMBCHG, LOOPBACK, CSESP, FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP, AIS AU4 = LOP, AIS, TCA-PJS UC = LOS CNCT = 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS

4.2.1d SCSU

Set Alarm Attribute

SCSU

SV = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, LOG-THC, TLOG-THC, SUBUNIT-FAIL, RCI). RUC (LOS). RSC (LOF). DCC (DCC-FAIL). RPS (PRCM). COM (ACTACO). CNCT (SINT-FAIL) ECU1,2 = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, RCI). DCC (DCC-FAIL) HK1,2 = EQPT (same as ECU1,2) TCU = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, WKSWP, RCI, MANSW, FRCDSW, FRZSW, PSFAIL). CLKBIT (LOS-2MB, AIS, FAL). CLKHZ (LOS-2MH). SYNC (SWTOHO, SWTOINT, HOLDOVER, INTERNAL, MANSW, EXTCLK-CUTOFF, QUALITY-DOWN, SYNSW PRI1/2/3)

4.2.1e

Set Trace

BBIU

e1

Set OHB

BBIU

J0 Byte (N/STMID/TRC) for Trace

e2

Set Trace Value

BBIU

Expect Trace, Sending Trace, MIS-STI Alarm OFF

f

Set Signal Label

BBIU

f1

Set OHB

BBIU

Usage of SOH for signal label

f2

Set SLB Value

BBIU

Signal label value

4.2.2

Set Radio Interface

MSTU

a

Set RSPI

MSTU

Recovery (and Generation) of BERALM, Route ID, SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)

b

Set Radio Channel

MSTU

Frequency CH, Local Clock Master/Slave, MOD/DEM function

c

Set Facility Threshold

MSTU

SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS

d

Set Level Threshold

MSTU

RL-1, RL-2, TL (dBm)

e

Set Auto Transmit Control

MSTU

ATPC Mode (LOW/HIGH/AUTO) ATPC Initiator Level (dBm)

f

Set RSC

All

X(Prot)/Y(Main), DSC SEL (P/W1 to 7)

4.2.3

Set Way side traffic

MSTU

SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N)

4.2.4

Set User Channel

BBIU

64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)

4.2.5

Set Radio User Channel

All

RUCVFT(dBr), 64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Inhibit

RUCVFR(dBr),

5-43

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE No. 4.3

LCT Command

UMN Unit

Functions

System

4.3.1

Set NE ID

All

NE ID = TID = System ID

4.3.2

Set Date and Time

All

Current date and time

4.3.3

Set System Configuration

All

System Type, RF Type, FRQ Arrangement, Space Diversity, Line Interface, BBIU Use, Group1 Max CH, Group2 Max CH, Group 1 RPS (Y/N), Group 2 RPS (Y/N)

4.3.4

Set Optional Unit Configuration

All

ECU (Y/N), HK unit (Y/N), TCU Protection

4.3.5

Set Interface Configuration All

Sets BB INTF configuration N/OPTL1/OPTL2/OPTL3

4.3.6

Set PM Time

All

Standard time for Performance Monitor start

4.3.7

Set Housekeeping Alarm

SCSU

Alarm Severity, Alarm Type, Alarm Message

4.3.8

Set Ext. Control Name

SCSU

Control Type

4.3.9

Set Alarm Delay

All

ALM ACT Time (0/2.5/10), ALM DACT Time (0/16)

4.3.10

Set Synchronization

All

a

Set Synch Mode

All

Synch Mode = ½

b

Set Synch Parameter

All

CLK MODE (TCU/THROUGH), EC Priority (1/2), LC Priority (1/2/3), Ext 2Mhz, Ext 2Mb/s, EC output 2Mbit EC Threshold, LC Threshold, Error Free (Y/N)

4.3.11

Set Radio Protection Sys

a

Set System Parameter

All

Maximum CH, Priority CH, Wait to Restore, OCC Use

b

Set SW Initiator

All

SW Initiator (Y/N)

4.3.12

Set MSP

BBIU

Lock in Function, Switching Count, Monitor Time, Hold Time, Direction, Persist Check Time, Uni/Bi Code Mask, MSP Mode Setting

4.3.13

Set ALS

BBIU

ALS Function (Y/N), Release Time

4.3.14

Set Equipment Inventory

All

Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No. NE-Type, Resource Status, Eqpt-Note

4.3.15

Set LBK Release Time

4.3.16

Set Orderwire

Loopback RLS Time (hour)

a

Set OHB

BBIU

E1 (Y/N), E2 (Y/N)

b

Channel Select

All

E1/2 (N/GP-W1/ GP-W2/....)

c

OW Function

All

OW Function (Y/N), Group Address, Station Address, LED, Buzzer, Relay, Ringer

d

OW Extension

All

OW Extension E1/2, OW VF TX/RX (-dBr)

All

Mode 1 (Normal = yellow) / Mode 2 (Normal = green)

4.3.17

5-44

Set LED Mode

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

No.

LCT Command

4.4

Section DCC

Unit

Functions

4.4.1

SDCC Service State

All

In service/Out of Service

4.4.2

LAPD Parameter

All

Window Size, Frame Timeout, Inact Timeout, Retries, Frame Size, LAPD Cmd/Rsp, LAPD Data Link

4.4.3

Set 2 DCC

All

2 DCC CH selection

4.5

nd

nd

OSS Interface

4.5.1

OSSI type & Service State All

X25/OSI/Back to Back, IS/OOS

4.5.2

LAPB Parameter

All

Type, Window Size, Retry Timer, Packet Size, Retransmit

4.5.3

X25 Parameter

All

X25 Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Restart Timer, Request Timeout, Reset Timeout, Clear Timeout, Closed User ID, Channel-Lower, ChannelUpper

4.5.4

VC Parameter

All

PVC = Group No. CH NO. Peer Address SVC = Peer Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Ntwk User ID

4.6

Network Layer Protocol

4.6.1

NLP Parameter

All

NLP Type (IS1/IS1 IS2/ES), Area Address, System ID

4.6.2

NLP Manual Adjacency

All

NLP Type (SVC/PVC), Area Address, System ID

4.6.3

NLP Address Prefix

All

NLP Type (SVC), Area Prefix

4.6.4

NLP Manual Area Address All

Manual Area Address

4.6.5

Display NLP Manual Area Address

All

Scope (LCL/NTWK)

4.6.6

NLP Intermediate Sys1

All

Max Area

4.6.7

NLP Intermediate Sys2

All

Reachable Area Address

4.7

TARP Control

TID Address Resolution Protocol Control

4.7.1

TARP Parameters

All

TARP Type, Response Time

4.7.2

TARP Manual Adjacency

All

Adjacency NTWK Address, Destination NTWK Address, NPL Type

4.7.3

Display TARP Manual Adjacency

All

Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address

4.7.4

Display TARP Cache

All

Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address, TID List

4.7.5

Operate TARP Echo

All

Destination TID, System ID, NTWK Address, Request Working Address, Retries, Response Timer, TID List

All

TARP Packet, Packet Size, LAN SAP, Service State

4.8

LAN Parameters

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-45

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

No. 5 5.1

LCT Command

UMN

Unit

Functions

Status/Control Shelf Condition

5.1.1

Display Log files

All

AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type, Service Effect, Monitor Value, Threshold Level, Location, Direction, Occurred Time, Cleared Time, Condition Description

5.1.2

Display All Log files

All

Same as “Display Log Files”

5.1.3

Clear Log files

All

Clears Log files

5.1.4

Display List

5.2

Maintenance All

AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type

Radio Protection Switch

5.2.1

Group 1

All

Lockout, Force, Manual, Alarm, Display SW PM Data, Clear SW PM Data, Set SW Initiator, Set System Parameter

5.2.2

Group 2

All

Same as Group 1

All

Displays Equipment in Out of Service condition

5.3

Service State

5.3.1

Display Eqpt OOS List

5.3.2

Display List

5.4 5.4.1.

Facility

OOS All

Displays Facilities in Out of Service condition

Performance Monitor Display PM Data

MSTU

RSPI = BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OFS, BBER, ESR, SESR

BBIU

STM1RS/STM1MS = BBE, ES, SES,UAS,OFS, BBER, ESR, SESR AU4 = PJCH, PJCL, PJCS

5.4.2

Clear PM Data

All

Deletes Logged PM Data of selected facility

5.4.3

Clear PM Data ALL

All

Deletes Logged PM Data all

5.5

Analog Monitor

5.5.1

Display Current Level

MSTU

RL-M, RL-SD, TL

5.5.2

Display History Level

MSTU

TL-MAX, TL-MIN, RL-M/SD-MIN/MAX

5.5.3

Display TC Second

MSTU

TLTS (15M/24H), RLTS-M/SD-1/2 (15M/24H)

5.5.4

Clear History Data

MSTU

5-46

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

No.

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

LCT Command

Unit

Functions

5.6

Display CSES Log

MSTU BBIU

Displays 15 minute data

5.7

Housekeeping Alarm

SCSU

Retrieve

5.8

External Control

SCSU

Operate/Release

5.9

Change Maint State

MSTU BBIU

Remove = Changes from IS to Maintenance Restore = Changes from Maintenance to IS Retrieve = Displays current status

5.10

Trace

BBIU

MIS-STI Alarm OFF, Expect Trace, Sending Trace, Incoming Trace

5.11

Signal Label

BBIU

Displays Signal Label

5.12

Alarm Cut Off

All

Disables audible alarm extension

5.13

Loop Back BBIU

STM1MS LINE/RADIO Remove/Restore/Retrieve

5.13.1

Change Maint State

(MSTU) 5.13.2

Operate Loopback

BBIU

=

STM1MS LINE/RADIO = Operate/Release

(MSTU) 5.13.3 5.14 5.14.1

Display Loopback State All

Displays facilities in Loopback

Protection Switch Operate Protection SW

BBIU

STM1MS LINE = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for MSP

SCSU

EQPT = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for TCU X/Y

5.14.2

Operate Synch SW

All

EC/LC = PR1/2/3, INT, HO

5.14.3

Display Prot SW State

All

Displays Protection switches operated

MSTU

RSPI = Remove/Restore/Retrieve

5.15

Maintenance Interface

Radio

5.15.1

Change Maint State

5.15.2

Radio Physical Interface MSTU

Carrier Wave ON, Auto Gain Control Off, Auto Level Control Off, Frequency Measurement

5.15.3

RSPI Adjustment

MSTU

TXPWR, TXGAIN, SDGAIN, SDSLOPE

5.15.4

Maintenance for SD

MSTU

SD DADE OFF, EPS OFF

5.15.5

Maintenance for Co-CH MSTU

XPIC-OFF, RXCLINT

5.15.6

Dade Adjustment

DADEADJST

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

MSTU

RXRFGAIN,

RXIFGAIN,

5-47

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

No.

LCT Command

5.15.7

Display Maint State

5.16

UMN

Unit All

Functions Displays Controls in maintenance position

Physical Inventory

5.16.1

Display Inventory

Equipment All

5.16.2

Display Unit Inventory

AID, Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No, NE-Type, Resource-Status, Eqpt-Status, NE-Manual-Code, NE-Product-Code, NE-Serial-No, NE-ACPT-Date, NE-WARR-END-Date

All

AID, SIU-Type, SIU-BLD-HW, SIU-MANU-Code, SIU-Serial-No, SIU-Barcode, SIU-ACPT-Date, SIU-WARR-END Date, SIU-BLD-STT

5.17

ALS Release

BBIU

Restart Mode = MAN/TST

5.18

RCI Control

All

Remote Card Identifier = Operate/Release

5.19

Auto Report Control

5.19.1

Allow Alarm Report

All

Allows automatic report of Alarm message

5.19.2

Inhibit Alarm Report

All

Inhibits automatic report of Alarm message

5.19.3

Allow PM Report

All

Allows automatic report of PM data (every 15M)

5.19.4

Inhibit PM Report

All

Inhibits automatic report of PM data

5.19.5

Allow LED Report

All

Allows automatic report of LED indication on Unit picture

5.19.6

Inhibit LED Report

All

Inhibits automatic report of LED indication

5.19.7

Allow Report

All

Validates “Allow Alarm Report” and “Allow LED Report” “Allow Report” is canceled when the user logged of.

5.19.8

PM Report Control

a

Periodical Report

All

Report Function [ STD ] = Y/N

b

No data Report

All

Report Function [NONDAT] = Y/N

c

Analog data Report

MSTU

Report Function [ LVL ] = Y/N

5.20

Transaction Log

All

5.20.1

Display Transaction Log All

5.20.1

Clear Transaction Log

5-48

All

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

No. 6

LCT Command

Unit

Functions

Administration

6.1

Add User

All

Adds and defines a new LCT user for the NE

6.2

Delete User

All

Deletes a LCT user from the NE

6.3

Change User

All

Changes privilege of a user

6.4

Change Logged Password

6.5

Show User List

6.6

Show Logged Privilege

7

User All All User All

Changes the password of user now logged on to the NE Shows the user list registered for the NE Shows privilege of the user now logged on to the NE

Window

7.1

Cascade

All

7.2

Tile Horizontal

All

7.3

Tile Vertical

All

7.4

Arrange Icons

All

7.5

Tool Bar

All

Shows/hides “Tool Bar” of the LCT screen

7.6

Status Bar

All

Shows/hides “Status Bar” at the bottom of LCT screen

7.7

Global View

All

Shows/hides “Global View” window

7.8

Output

All

Shows/hides “Command message lines” at the bottom of LCT screen

8

Controls the stile of screen display

Help

8.1

Help

All

Shows the general help of LCT application

8.2

About LCT

All

Shows the version of LCT application.

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5-49

UMN

A

A. APPENDIX

APPENDIX A.1

Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms Table A.1- Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms

Abbreviation

Description

A A/D

Analog to Digital converter

ACO

Alarm Cut Off

ACTAGC

Act Automatic Gain Control of Receiver

ACTALS

Act Automatic Laser Shut down

ACTCW

Act Carrier Wave mode

ADD

Address

ADM

Add Drop Multiplexer

AGC

Automatic Gain Control

AID

Access Identification

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

AIS REC

Alarm Indication Signal Receiving

ALC

Automatic Level Control

ALM

Alarm

ALSMAN

Automatic Laser Shut down released by Manual restart

ALSTST

Automatic Laser Shut down released by Test restart

AMP

Amplifier

ANS

Answer

ANT

Antenna

APS

Automatic Protection Switch

ASCII

American Standard Cord for Information Interchange

ATPC

Automatic Transmitter Power Control

ATT

Attenuator

AU 4

Administrative Unit 4

AUD NE ALM

Audible Network Element Alarm

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

1

A. APPENDIX

UMN Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

B B/S

Bit per Second

BAL

Balance

BB

Base Band signal

BBC

Base Band Control

BBE

Background Block Error

BBIU

Base Band Interface Unit

BEF

Band Eliminate Filter

BER

Bit Error Ratio

BIP

Bit Interleave Parity check

BPF

Band Pass Filter

BR NTWK

Branching Network(Radio frequency band)

BRU

Branching Network Unit

BSI

Bit Sequence Independence

BSW

Bipolar Switch

BWB

Back Wired Board

C

2

C/I

Carrier to Interface ratio

CIR

Circulator

CK

Clock

CLK

Clock

CMB

Channel management Bus

CMI

Code Mark Inversion

CN

Connector

CNCT

Connect

CODIRE

Co-directional interface

CONTRA

Contra-directional interface

CPU

Central Processor Unit

CR

Critical Alarm

CSESP

Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Occurred

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

A. APPENDIX Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

D D/A

Digital to Analog converter

DADE

Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer

DCC

Digital Communication Channel

DEF

Decision Feedback

DEM

Demodulator

DI

Data Input

DMM

Digital Multi-Meter

DO

Data Output

DSC

Digital Service Channel

DTMF

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

DUP

Duplexer

E EC

Equipment Clock

ECU

Embedded Channel Unit/ Embedded Communication Unit/

EOW

Engineering Order Wire

EPS

Endless Phase Shifter

EQL

Equalizer

ES

Errored Second

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

ETSI

European Telecommunication Standard Institute

F F LOSS

Frame Loss

FEBE

Far End Block Error

FEC

Forward Error Correction

FEFR

Far End Receive Failure

FESP

Fifteen minute Error Seconds Performance

FET

Field Effect Transistor

FG

Frame Ground

FIL

Filter

FLR

Failure

FMSR

Frequency Measurement

FRCDSW

Switch is in Forced Switching mode

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

3

A. APPENDIX

UMN Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

G G

Ground

GAAS

Gallium Arsenide

GNE

Gateway Network Element

GUI

Graphical User Interface

GP1

Group 1

GP2

Group 2

H H

Horizontal

HDB3

High Density Bipolar 3

HEMT

High Electron Mobility Transistor

HK

Housekeeping

HL

Higher Layer

HL CPU

Higher Layer Central Processor Unit

HPA

High Power Amplifier

HYB

Hybrid circuit

I

4

ICH

In-phase Channel

ID

Identification

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

IF

Intermediate Frequency

INI

Initiator

INTF

Interface

IS

In Service

ITU

International Telecommunication Union

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

A. APPENDIX Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

L LAPD

Link Application Procedure D channel

LBOL

Laser Bias current is too High.

LC

Line Clock

L6G

Lower 6 GHz band

L7G

Lower 7 GHz band

L8G

Lower 8 GHz band

LED

Light Emitting Diode

LL CPU

Lower Layer Central Processor Unit

LNA

Low Noise Amplifier

LO

Local

LO MON

Local Monitor

LOF

Loss Of Frame

LOP

Loss Of Pointer

LOS

Loss Of Signal

LPF

Low Pass Filter

LSI

Large Scale Integrated circuit

LTE

Line Terminal Equipment

LVL

Level

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

5

A. APPENDIX

UMN Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

M MAINT

Maintenance

MANSW

Manual Switch

MC

Maintenance Center

MID

Minimum Dispersion combiner

MISC

Miscellaneous

MIX

Mixer

MJ

Major alarm

MLCM

Multi Level Code Modulation

MN

Minor alarm

MN ANT

Main Antenna

MOD

Modulator

MPU

Micro-Processor Unit

MS

Multiplex Section

MSP

Multiplex Section Protection

MSTU

Main Signal Transmission Unit

MUX

Multiplexer

N

6

NA

Not Applicable

NC

Not Connection

NE

Network Element

NEND

Near END

NFB

No Fuse Breaker

NLP

Network Layer Protocol

NMS

Network Management System

NORM

Normal

NSA

Non Service Affect

NWC

Network Center

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

A. APPENDIX Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

O OCC

Occasional

OFS

Out of Frame Second

OOS

Out Of Service

OP AMP

Operational Amplifier

OPD

Degradation in Optical Power transmitted

OPOR

Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range.

OPT

Optical

OS

Operation Software

OSC

Oscillator

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection

OSSI

Operation Support System Interface

OW TEL

Orderwire Telephone

P PC

Personal Computer

PCB

Printed Circuit Board

PCM

Pulse Code Multiplex

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PI

Photo coupler Interface

PJCH

Pointer Justification Count High

PJCL

Pointer Justification Count Low

PJCS

Pointer Justification Count SEcond

PLL

Phase Lock Loop

PLO

Phase Lock Loop controlled Oscillator

PM

Performance Monitor

PM DATA

Performance Monitor Data

PPM

Percent Per Million

PSC

Protection Switching Second

PSFAIL

Power Supply Failure

PVC

Permanent Virtual Circuit

PWR

Power

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

7

A. APPENDIX

UMN Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

Q QAM

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QCH

Quadrature Channel

R

8

R CLK

Receive Clock

RAB

Rack Alarm Bus

RADRM

Radio Route ID Mismatch

RAM

Random Access Memory

RCI

Remote Card Identification

RCK

Receive Clock

RCLK

Receive Clock

RAI

Remote Alarm Indication

RCI

Remote Card Identifier

RCV

Receive

RD

Receive Data

RDP

Receiver Data Processing

RF

Radio Frequency

RFCOH

Radio Frame Complementary Over Head byte

RL

Relay

RL-1

Receiving Level-1

RL-2

Receiving Level-2

RL-M

Receiving Level of Main receiver

RL-SD

Receiving Level of SD receiver

RLTS

Received Level Threshold Second

RMVD

Required unit is missing

RPS

Radio Protection Switching

RRF

Receiver Radio Frequency section

RS

Regenerative Section

RSL

Receive Signal Level

RST

Reset

RUC

Radio service Channel

RX

Receiver

RX-LOS

Loss of Signal in RX

RXLCINT

RX Local Internal Clock

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

A. APPENDIX Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

S S CLK

Send Clock

SA

Service Affect

SC

Service Channel

SCSU

Switching Control, Supervision Unit

SD

Space Diversity

SD-RCV-DN

SD Receiver Down

SDH

Synchronous Digital hierarchy

SEMF

Synchronous Equipment Management Function

SES

Severely Errored Second

SEV

Severely Errored Threshold

SG

Signal Ground

SIU

Slide In Unit

SLP EQL

Slope Equalizer

SR

Shift Register

SS BIT

Synchronous State Bit

SSMB

Synchronous State Message Byte

SSU

Synchronous Source Unit

STD

Standard

STM-1

Synchronous Transfer Module level 1

SUE-RP

Unavailable State Entered (RP)

SV

Supervision/Supervisory

SVC

Switched Virtual Circuit

SW

Switch

SWDL

Software Down Load

SWTOHO

Synchronization reference is in Holdover state

SWTOINT

Internal source signal is used for Synchronization

SYNC

Synchronization

SYNSW

Synchronization Switch

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

9

A. APPENDIX

UMN Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Abbreviation

T TARP

TID Address Resolution Protocol

TCA-OFS

Threshold Crossing Alert-

TCA-RLTS

Threshold Crossing Alert- RX Level Threshold

TCA-RP

Threshold Crossing Alert-

TCA-TLTS

Threshold Crossing Alert-TX Level Threshold

TCK

Transmit Clock

TCLK

Transmit Clock

TCU

Timing Control Unit

TD

Transmit Data

TD N

Transmit Data Negative

TD P

Transmit Data Positive

TDP

Transmitter Data Processing

TEL

Telephone

TESP

Twenty four Hour Error Seconds

TID

Target Identification

TIF

Transmitter IF section

TL

Transmitter output Level

TL 1

Transaction Language 1

TLTS

Transmitted output Level Threshold Second

TRF

Transmitter RF section

TVE

Transversal Equalizer

TX

Transmitter

TX-FLR

Transmitter Failure

U

10

U6G

Upper 6 GHz

U8G

Upper 8 GHz

UAS

Un-available Second / Un-available State

UC

User’s service Channel

UCH

User’s service Channel

UL

User Level Layer

USW

Unipolar Switch

UAF

Un-Availability Filter

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

UMN

A. APPENDIX Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued) Abbreviation

Description

V VCO

Voltage Controlled Oscillator

VF

Voice Frequency

VIS NE ALM

Visual Network Element Alarm

W WKSWP

Working unit Switched to Protection

WR

Warning

WS

Wayside Signal

WTR

Wait To Restore

X XPIC

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

11

SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications User Manual (UMN) 911-362/02C0000

SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications User Manual (UMN) 911-362/02C0000

SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications User Manual (UMN) 911-362/02C0000

SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications User Manual (UMN) 911-362/02C0000